OM0C009U

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Toyota Tundra Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 672

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety
and security

Make sure to read through them

Instrument
cluster

How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.

Operation of
3 each

component

Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.

4 Driving

Operations and advices which are necessary for
driving

5 Multimedia

Operating the multimedia system

6 Interior features

Usage of the interior features, etc.

Maintenance
and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance
procedures

When trouble
arises

What to do in case of malfunction or emergency

Vehicle
specifications

Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.

10 For owners

Index

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat
belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian
owners
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information....................... 8
Reading this manual .................... 12
How to search.............................. 13
Pictorial index .............................. 14
1 For safety and security
1-1. For safe use
Before driving ...................... 28
For safe driving ................... 30
Seat belts ............................ 32
SRS airbags ........................ 38
Front passenger occupant
classification system ......... 50
Safety information
for children ........................ 55
Child restraint systems........ 56
Installing child restraints...... 60
Exhaust gas precautions..... 75
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system............................... 76
Alarm................................... 85
2 Instrument cluster
2.

Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators........................... 90
Gauges and meters............. 95
Multi-information display ... 100
Fuel consumption
information ...................... 107

Operation of
each component

3-1. Key information
Keys................................... 110
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors ......................... 114
Tailgate.............................. 118
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats......................... 123
Rear seats ......................... 126
Driving position memory
(driver’s seat)................... 128
Head restraints .................. 132
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel................... 136
Inside rear view mirror ....... 139
Outside rear view
mirrors ............................. 142
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows.................. 147
Back window...................... 150
Power back window........... 151
Moon roof .......................... 154

4 Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle............. 160
Cargo and luggage............ 168
Vehicle load limits ............. 171
Trailer towing..................... 173
Dinghy towing.................... 194
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch ..... 195
Automatic transmission ..... 197
Turn signal lever................ 204
Parking brake .................... 205
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch ................ 206
Automatic High Beam ....... 211
Fog light switch ................. 216
Windshield wipers and
washer ............................ 217
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap .................................. 220

4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense P...... 224
PCS (Pre-Collision
System) ........................... 231
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)................................244
Dynamic radar cruise
control.............................. 252
Cruise control .................... 266
Intuitive parking assist ....... 270
Rear view monitor
system ............................. 277
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor)......... 286
Four-wheel drive system ... 296
AUTO LSD system ............ 299
Driving assist systems ....... 301
Trailer brake controller....... 308
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips .............. 312
Off-road precautions.......... 316

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5 Multimedia
5-1. Basic Operations
Multimedia system types... 322
Entune Audio..................... 324
Steering wheel audio
switches .......................... 327
USB Port/AUX Port ........... 328
5-2. Setup
Setup menu....................... 329
General settings ................ 330
Audio settings.................... 332
Display settings ................. 333
Voice settings.................... 334
5-3. Using the audio system
Basic audio operations...... 335
Selecting the audio
source ............................. 336
List screen operation......... 337
Sound settings .................. 339
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation................. 340
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation .......... 342

5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod ........... 347
Listening to a USB
memory device ................ 351
Using the AUX port............ 355
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Preparations to use
wireless
communication ................ 356
Registering a Bluetooth®
audio player
for the first time................ 361
Registering a Bluetooth®
phone for the first time .... 362
Registering a Bluetooth®
device .............................. 363
Connecting a Bluetooth®
device .............................. 365
Displaying a Bluetooth®
device details................... 367
Detailed Bluetooth®
system settings................ 368
5-8. Bluetooth® audio
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio................................369

5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Using a Bluetooth®
phone .............................. 370
Making a call ..................... 372
Receiving a call ................. 375
Speaking on the phone ..... 376
Bluetooth® phone
message function............ 379
Using the steering
wheel switches................ 383
Bluetooth® phone
settings............................ 384
Contact/Call History
Settings ........................... 386
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............ 395
5-10. Using the voice
command system
Voice command system .... 399
5-11. Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® ......................... 403
5-12. Antenna
Antenna............................. 408
6 Interior features
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system
Manual air conditioning
system............................. 412
Automatic air conditioning
system............................. 419
Seat heaters/
seat ventilators................ 426

6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list................. 429
• Personal/interior lights
main switch ................... 430
• Personal/interior
lights.............................. 430
• Cargo lamp main
switch ............................ 431
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features ...... 432
• Glove box ...................... 434
• Console box (front
separated type seat) ..... 435
• Card holder ................... 436
• Map holder (front
bench type seat)............ 438
• Pen holder..................... 439
• Tissue pocket ................ 440
• Overhead console ......... 441
• Cup holders ................... 442
• Bottle holders ................ 444
• Auxiliary boxes (front
bench type seat)............ 445
• Storage box ................... 447
Luggage compartment
features ........................... 449
6-4. Using the other interior features
Other interior features........ 450
• Sun visors ..................... 450
• Vanity mirrors ................ 450
• Clock ............................. 451
• Power outlets ................ 452
• Armrest.......................... 454
• Assist grips .................... 455
Garage door opener .......... 456
Compass ........................... 465

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7 Maintenance and care

8 When trouble arises

7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.......... 470
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior........... 473

8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers........... 538
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in
an emergency.................. 539

7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ................... 476
General maintenance........ 478
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs......................... 481

8-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs to
be towed.......................... 540
If you think something is
wrong............................... 545
Fuel pump shut off
system ............................. 546
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds............................. 547
If a warning message is
displayed ......................... 555
If you have a flat tire .......... 565
If the engine will not
start ................................. 580
If the vehicle battery is
discharged....................... 582
If your vehicle overheats.... 585
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................588

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ..................... 482
Hood.................................. 484
Engine compartment ......... 485
Tires .................................. 495
Tire inflation pressure........ 507
Wheels .............................. 510
Air conditioning filter.......... 513
Wireless remote control
battery ............................. 516
Checking and replacing
fuses ............................... 518
Light bulbs......................... 521

9 Vehicle specifications
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .......... 592
Fuel information ................ 610
Tire information ................. 614

Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)..................... 654
Alphabetical index ...................... 657

9-2. Customization
Customizable features ...... 624
9-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize................ 632
10 For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................ 634
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................... 635
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) .............................. 637
Camper information ................... 646

For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer
to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the multimedia system.
Multimedia system types: →P. 322

For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance,
repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety
or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be
covered under warranty.

9
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Toyota Safety Sense P (if equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control system (if equipped)
● Cruise control system (if equipped)
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

Vehicle data recordings
Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record
certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or
sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.
● Data Transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota
without notification to you.
● Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
● To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by
Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.

10
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

11
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer
before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that
distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition,
heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal
to children.

Reading this manual
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or
serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to
or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
1 2 3

Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps
in numerical order.

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to
operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do
this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

How to search
■ Searching by name

• Alphabetical index .......P. 657

■ Searching

installation

position
• Pictorial index................P. 14

■ Searching by symptom or

sound
• What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ........P. 654

■ Searching by title

• Table of contents .............P. 2

Pictorial index

Pictorial index
■ Exterior

1 Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 114
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 114
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 147
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 557
2 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 118
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 118
Opening/closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 118
Removing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 119
3 Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 142
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 142
Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Driving position memory*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 128
Defogging the mirrors*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 414, 421
4 Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 312
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)*2 . . . . . . . P. 415, 422
5 Back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150, 151

Pictorial index

6 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . .
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coping with overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P. 220
P. 220
P. 601
P. 495
P. 607
P. 312
P. 495
P. 565
P. 484
P. 484
P. 602
P. 585
P. 277

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 521, Watts: P. 609)

10 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206
11 Fog lights*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 216
12 Front turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
13 Parking lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206
14 Rear turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
15 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206
16 License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206
17 Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
18 Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206

*1: If equipped on CrewMax models
*2: If equipped

Pictorial index

■ Instrument panel


Front separated type seats

1 Engine switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195
Starting the engine/changing the positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195
Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 539
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 580
2 Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 540
When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
3 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 95
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . P. 95
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 90
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 547
4 Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 100
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 100
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 555
5 Parking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 313
Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 548, 557

Pictorial index

6 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog lights*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P. 204
P. 206
P. 206
P. 216
P. 217
P. 217
P. 494
P. 558

P. 484
9 Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever*2 . . . . . . . . P. 136
10 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch*3 . . . . . . . . . . . P. 137
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 137
Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 128
11 Manual air conditioning system*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 412
Automatic air conditioning system*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 419
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 412, 419
Back window defogger*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 414, 421
Windshield wiper de-icer*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 415, 422
12 Multimedia system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 322

*1: If equipped
*

Vehicles without driving position memory
*3: Vehicles with driving position memory
*4: For CrewMax models

Pictorial index



Front bench type seat

Pictorial index

5 Parking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 313
Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 548, 557
6 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206
Fog lights*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 216
7 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 494
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 558
8 Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 484
9 Tilt steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 136
10 Manual air conditioning system*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 412
Automatic air conditioning system*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 419
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 412, 419
Back window defogger*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 414, 421
Windshield wiper de-icer*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 415, 422
11 Multimedia system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 322

*1: If equipped
*

: For CrewMax models

Pictorial index

■ Switches

The illustration represents the instrument panel for the front separated type
seat.

1 Driving position memory switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 129
2 Power window switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 147
3 Door lock switch*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 115
4 Window lock switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 147
5 Outside rear view mirror switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 142
6 Personal/interior lights main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 430
7 Cargo lamp main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 431
8 Manual headlight leveling dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208
9 Automatic High Beam switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
10 Power back window switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 151
11 Intuitive parking assist switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 270
12 VSC off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 299, 304
13 TOW/HAUL switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 200
14 Trailer brake controller*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 308

Pictorial index

1 Meter control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 101
2 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 259
3 Cruise control switch
Cruise control*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 266
Dynamic radar cruise control*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 252
4 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 247
5 Telephone switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 383
6 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . P. 137
7 Audio remote control switches*3
8 Talk switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 399

*1: If equipped
*2: For CrewMax models and if equipped on Double Cab models
*3: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

1 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 538
2 Front-wheel drive control switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 296
3 Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
4 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 452
5 AUX port/USB port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 328

*: If equipped

Pictorial index

■ Interior


Front separated type seats

1 SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38
2 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28
3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 123
4 Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 126
5 Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 132
6 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 32
7 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 435
8 Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 115
9 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 442
10 Bottle holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 444

Pictorial index



Front bench type seat

1 SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38
2 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28
3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 123
4 Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 126
5 Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 132
6 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 32
7 Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 115
8 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 442
9 Bottle holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 444

Pictorial index

1 Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 139
2 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 450
3 Vanity mirrors*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 450
4 Personal/interior lights*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 430
5 Moon roof switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 154
6 Garage door opener switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 456

*1: If equipped
*

: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

Pictorial index

For safety and security

1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving...................... 28
For safe driving ................... 30
Seat belts ............................ 32
SRS airbags........................ 38
Front passenger occupant
classification system ......... 50
Safety information
for children ........................ 55
Child restraint systems........ 56
Installing child restraints...... 60
Exhaust gas precautions..... 75
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system .............................. 76
Alarm................................... 85

1-1. For safe use

Before driving
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips)

into the floor mat eyelets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each

retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the

marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P, fully depress each pedal to
the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

For safety and security

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving

1-1. For safe use

For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate
position before driving.
Correct driving posture
1 Adjust the angle of the seat-

back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (→P. 123)
2 Adjust the seat so that you can

depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at
the elbow when gripping the
steering wheel. (→P. 123)
3 Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint

closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 132)
4 Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 32)

Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P. 32)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
(→P. 56)
Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside
and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 139, 142)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

For safety and security

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to
feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so that
it comes fully over the shoulder,
but does not come into contact
with the neck or slide off the
shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well
back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
1 To fasten the seat belt, push the

plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
2 To release the seat belt, press

the release button.

Release button

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height
1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release

button.
2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.


Front seats



Rear seats (CrewMax models)

For safety and security

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal or
side collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact or a
rear impact.

1-1. For safe use

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This
feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt
again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 60)
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 56)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P. 32)
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for
the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt extender
is available from your Toyota dealer free
of charge.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 32)
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 32)

For safety and security

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or an accident. (→P. 33)
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

For safety and security

■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.

1-1. For safe use

◆ SRS front airbags
1 SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and right front
passenger from impact with interior components
2 SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
4 SRS curtain shield airbags

● Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
● Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

For safety and security

3 SRS side airbags

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbag system components

1 Seat belt pretensioners

9 Driver airbag

2 Knee airbags

10 Driver’s seat position sensor

3 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

11 Side impact sensors (rear)

OFF” indicator lights
4 Front passenger airbag
5 Curtain shield airbags
6 Side airbags (front seats)
7 Front

passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)

8 SRS warning light

12 Side impact sensors (front

door)
13 Driver’s

seat

belt

buckle

switch
14 Front passenger’s seat belt

buckle switch
15 Front impact sensors
16 Airbag sensor assembly

1-1. For safe use

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.

For safety and security

Front bench type seat: The SRS airbags are designed to protect the
driver and right front passenger, and they are not designed to protect
an occupant in the front center seating position.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from
the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10
in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply
by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your
seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, nonslippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.
● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the seat
belt, the SRS front airbags will judge
that the driver and front passenger are
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the SRS front airbags may
not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

For safety and security

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P. 56)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seats toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail
and assist grip.

● Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard
objects such as keys and accessories
to the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust
into the driver’s seat area by the force
of the deploying airbag, thus causing a
danger.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious
injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

For safety and security

■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,
winches or roof luggage carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

1-1. For safe use

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags,
due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rails,
may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately
12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not
move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following
situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which
can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the right front passenger seat. However, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat,
even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 50)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle
orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
● The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe
frontal collision.

1-1. For safe use

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than
a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a
serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are
shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward
deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

For safety and security

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown in
the illustration.

1-1. For safe use

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side
collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end

1-1. For safe use

■ When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

For safety and security

● A portion of a door or its surrounding
area is damaged or deformed, or the
vehicle was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags to
inflate.

1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification
system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front
passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front passenger
airbag, front passenger knee airbag and front passenger's seat
belt pretensioner.

1 Seat belt reminder light
2 SRS warning light
3 “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
4 “AIR BAG ON” indicator light

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1

Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG ON”

SRS warning light

Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Off*2
or
flashing*3

Front passenger airbag
Devices

Front passenger knee airbag

Activated

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
■ Child*4 or child restraint system*5

Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

“AIR BAG
OFF”*6

SRS warning light

Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Off*2
or
flashing*3

Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Devices

Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

Activated

For safety and security

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

1-1. For safe use

■ Unoccupied
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
warning light

Not illuminated

SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated

Devices

Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

Activated*7
or
deactivated*8

■ There is a malfunction in the system
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light
On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated

Devices

Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*4: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the
front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult
depending on his/her physique or posture.

1-1. For safe use

*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on
the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 56)

*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how
to install the child restraint system properly. (→P. 60)

* : In the event of a side collision.
*8: In the event of a frontal collision or rollover.
7

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the right front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from
the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt
extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated.
If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate,
which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pockets).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

For safety and security

WARNING

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear
seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear
seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the
vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 60)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your
Toyota dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
● Do not attach a commercial seatback table or other heavy item to the back
of the front passenger seat.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

1-1. For safe use

Safety information for children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt.

WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.

For safety and security

● Double Cab and CrewMax models: It is recommended that children
sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever,
wiper switch, etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch (if
equipped) to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, tailgate, seats,
etc.

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be
properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/
shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(→P. 60)

1-1. For safe use

Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child:


Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat



Forward facing ⎯ Convertible
seat
1

Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat
and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 32)

For safety and security



1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

For safety and security

■ Child restraint precautions
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of an accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions.
Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH
anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing
a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system
is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children) system.


Double Cab models

Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for
the outer rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors
are attached to the seats.)

Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint
locking
mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver's
seat belt) (→P. 34)

Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided on
each rear seat.

1-1. For safe use


CrewMax models

Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for
the outer rear seats.

Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided on
each rear seat.

For safety and security

Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint
locking
mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver's
seat belt) (→P. 34)

1-1. For safe use

Installation with LATCH system (Double Cab models)


Type A

1 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
2 Latch the hooks of the lower

straps
onto
the
LATCH
anchors. If the child restraint
has a top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be latched
onto the top tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.

Canada only


Type B

1 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
2 Latch

the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.

Canada only

1-1. For safe use

Installation with LATCH system (CrewMax models)


Type A

1 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
2 Latch the hooks of the lower

straps
onto
the
LATCH
anchors. If the child restraint
has a top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be latched
onto the top tether strap anchor.

For safety and security

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.

Canada only


Type B

1 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
2 Latch

Canada only

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
1 Place the child restraint sys-

tem on the seat facing the
rear of the vehicle.

2 Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt

and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.

1-1. For safe use

4 While

pushing the child
restraint system down into
the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.

■ Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat
1 Place the child restraint sys-

tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.

2 Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt

and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.

For safety and security

After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there
is no slack in the belt, pull the
belt to check that it cannot be
extended.

1-1. For safe use

4 While

pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt
to retract until the child
restraint system is securely
in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there
is no slack in the belt, pull the
belt to check that it cannot be
extended.

5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap

should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
(→P. 67, 70)
■ Booster seat
1 Place the child restraint sys-

tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.

2 Sit the child in the child

restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P. 32)

1-1. For safe use

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.

■ Right rear seat or center rear seat
1 Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt or the lower

anchors.
2 Remove the head restraints of

right and center rear seats.
(→P. 133)

3 Pull up the straps of right and

center seats.

For safety and security

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Double Cab models)

1-1. For safe use

4 Route the top tether strap through the anchor strap router as shown

in the illustration.
Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted.
1 Anchor strap router


Right rear seat



Center rear seat

5 Latch the hook onto the anchor strap ring and tighten the top tether

strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
1 Anchor strap ring


Right rear seat

6 Replace the head restraints of

right and center rear seats.
(→P. 134)



Center rear seat

1-1. For safe use

■ Left rear seat
1 Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt or the lower

anchors.
2 Remove the head restraints of

center and left rear seats.
(→P. 133)

left seats.

4 Route

the top tether strap
through the anchor strap router
as shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is
not twisted.
1 Anchor strap router

5 Latch the hook onto the anchor

strap ring and tighten the top
tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
1 Anchor strap ring

For safety and security

3 Pull up the straps of center and

1-1. For safe use

6 Replace the head restraints of

center and left seats. (→P. 134)

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (CrewMax models)
■ Right rear seat or center rear seat
1 Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt or the lower

anchors.
2 Remove the head restraints of

the right and center rear seats.
(→P. 133)

3 Route the top tether strap through the anchor strap belt as shown in

the illustration.
Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted.
1 Anchor strap belt


Right rear seat



Center rear seat

1-1. For safe use

4 Latch the hook onto the anchor strap belt and tighten the top tether

strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
1 Anchor strap belt


Right rear seat



Center rear seat
1

right and center rear seats.
(→P. 134)

For safety and security

5 Replace the head restraints of

1-1. For safe use

■ Left seat
1 Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt or the lower

anchors.
2 Remove the head restraints of

the center and left rear seats.
(→P. 133)

3 Route

the top tether strap
through the anchor strap belt as
shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is
not twisted.
1 Anchor strap belt

4 Latch the hook onto the anchor

strap belt and tighten the top
tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
1 Anchor strap belt

5 Replace the head restraints of

center and left rear seats.
(→P. 134)

1-1. For safe use

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
WARNING

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach the
child restraint system to the right-hand
rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

For safety and security

■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (→P. 34)
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden
braking or an accident.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of an accident or a sudden braking.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may
not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be
sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If
it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different
position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in
the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust
gases if inhale.
WARNING

For safety and security

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead
to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Double Cab and CrewMax models: Keep the back window closed.
● Double Cab and CrewMax models: If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back window is closed, open the windows and have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
● Toyota does not recommend occupying the rear cargo area when it is fitted
with a slide-in camper, camper shell or other type cover while the engine is
running. This caution applies to both driving and stopped or parked situations with the engine running. Particular care should be taken to prevent
exhaust gases from entering camper bodies, trailers or other enclosures
on or around your vehicle. If exhaust fumes are detected, open all windows and thoroughly ventilate the area.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent
the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does
not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed from
the engine switch to indicate that
the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the registered key has been
inserted into the engine switch to
indicate that the system has been
canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI-42BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complied with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

 For vehicles sold in New Caledonia

For safety and security

1-2. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

1-2. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

1-2. Theft deterrent system

For safety and security

1-2. Theft deterrent system

WARNING
■ Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Alarm∗
The alarm

Setting the alarm system
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors. The system will
be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the system is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors.
● Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position, or start the
engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

∗: If equipped

For safety and security

The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using a
key or wireless remote control. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
● Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor: The side windows are
tapped or broken.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of
the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof (if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door
or hood.

● The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically
lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the vehicle locks the door and the alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the
door.
● When recharging or replacing the battery.

■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

For safety and security

NOTICE

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Instrument cluster

2
2.

Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators .......................... 90
Gauges and meters ............ 95
Multi-information display ... 100
Fuel consumption
information ...................... 107

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and
center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.
*1

Seat belt reminder light
(→P. 548)

Brake system warning
light (→P. 547)
(U.S.A.)

*1
Master warning
(→P. 548)

Brake system warning
light (→P. 547)

light

*1, 3
Charging system warning light (→P. 547)

Parking brake warning
light (→P. 548)
(U.S.A.)

*1, 3
Malfunction
indicator
lamp (→P. 547)

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake warning
light (→P. 548)
(Canada)

*1
Malfunction
indicator
lamp (→P. 547)

Tire pressure
light (→P. 549)

warning

(Canada)

*1, 2
SRS warning light
(→P. 547)

Slip indicator (→P. 549)

*1, 3, 5
ABS warning light
(→P. 548)

PCS warning light
(→P. 550)

(U.S.A.)

*2, 4, 5
ABS warning light
(→P. 548)

(Canada)

LDA indicator (→P. 550)
(Yellow)

Low fuel level warning
light (→P. 548)

*4
High engine coolant temperature warning light
(→P. 556)

Instrument cluster

(Canada)

2. Instrument cluster

*4
Low windshield washer
fluid warning light
(→P. 558)

Brake Override System/
Drive-Start Control warning light (→P. 559, 562)

*4, 5
Low fuel level warning
light (→P. 558)

Automatic High Beam
indicator (→P. 562)

*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after
the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction
in a system if the lights do not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.

*2: The light comes on to indicate a malfunction.
*3: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*4: The light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*5: If equipped
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s
various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 204)

*1
Parking brake indicator
(→P. 205)
(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator
(→P. 206)
(U.S.A.)

*1
Parking brake indicator
(→P. 205)
(Canada)

*6, 9
Tail light indicator
(→P. 206)

Cruise control indicator
(→P. 261, 266)

(Canada)

Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 208)

Automatic High Beam
indicator (→P. 211)

*6
Cruise control “SET”
indicator (→P. 261, 266)

*6, 9
LDA indicator (→P. 247)
(Green)

2. Instrument cluster

Front fog light indicator
(→P. 216)

*1
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(→P. 302)

*1, 5

“RCTA” indicator
(→P. 286)

“AIR BAG ON” and
“AIR BAG OFF”
indicators (→P. 50)

Security indicator
(→P. 76, 85)
2

*6, 9

*1, 2

Slip indicator
(→ P. 302)

“AUTO LSD” indicator
(→P. 299, 302)

*1, 8, 9
PCS warning light
(→P. 235)

VSC off indicator
(→P. 299, 302)

“4HI” indicator (→P. 296)
(4WD models)

“TOW HAUL” indicator
(→P. 200)

“4LO” indicator (→P. 296)
(4WD models)

“BSM” indicator
(→P. 286)

*6
Trailer connection
indicator (→P. 308)
(Green)

*3, 4, 9

*6, 7
BSM outside rear view
mirror indicator
(→P. 286)

Low outside temperature
indicator

*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

Instrument cluster

Radar cruise control
indicator (→P. 252)

2. Instrument cluster

*3: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators
illuminate in the following situations:
• When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, the BSM function
is enabled on the
screen of the multi-information display.
• When the BSM function is enabled on the
screen of the multi-information display, the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not
turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*4: The light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*5: The light illuminates on the center panel.
*6: The light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*7: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the
indicator will flash for 10 times, then comes on.

* : The light comes on when the system is turned off.
*9: If equipped
8

WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

Instrument cluster

1 Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
2 Engine oil pressure gauge
Displays the engine oil pressure

3 Outside temperature display
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to
122°F (50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the
ambient temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower.

4 Voltmeter
Displays the charge state
5 Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
6 Odometer/Trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding
the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.

2. Instrument cluster

7 Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
8 Shift position and shift range display
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range. (→P. 197)

9 Odometer and trip meter display
Displays the following items.
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

10 Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data. (→P. 101)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction. (→P. 555)

11 Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
12 Instrument panel light control button

2. Instrument cluster

Changing the odometer/trip meter display
Pressing the button switches
between odometer and trip meter.

■ Odometer
■ Trip meter A*/trip meter B*

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter
was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

*: Press and hold the display change button to reset.
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Pressing the button will adjust
brightness of the instrument panel
light.
The brightness of the instrument
panel lights can be adjusted by
pressing the button.
Short press: 1 step change of
brightness level.
Long press: continues change of
brightness level until released.

Instrument cluster

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

2. Instrument cluster

■ The multi-information display illuminate when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the tail lights are turned on, the display’s brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest
setting.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in personal death or injury.

2. Instrument cluster

NOTICE

Instrument cluster

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 585)
■ Voltmeter
When the voltmeter indicates 19 V or higher or 9 V or lower while the engine
is running, there may be a battery or charging system malfunction. Have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.
■ Engine oil pressure gauge
When the value of the engine oil pressure gauge drops while the engine is
running, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and check the amount
of engine oil. (→P. 486)
When the oil pressure drops even though the engine oil amount has not
decreased, or if the oil pressure does not increase when engine oil is
added, contact your Toyota dealer, as there may be a problem with the lubrication system.

100

2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display
Display contents
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data.
● Menu icons
Displays the following information when an icon is selected.
Some of the information may be
displayed
automatically
depending on the situation.

Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (→P. 101)

Navigation system-linked display*
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)

Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter
using the meter control switches.

Vehicle information
Select to display the operational status of the following systems:
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert)* (→P. 244)
• Dynamic radar cruise control* (→P. 252)
• Tire inflation pressure (→P. 496)
• Trailer brake controller* (→P. 308)

2. Instrument cluster

101

Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a
malfunction is detected. (→P. 555)

Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings. (→P. 102)

*: If equipped
■ Operating the meter control switches

1 Select an item/change pages

Press and hold: Resets
3 Switch

menu/Displays
top screen

4 Returns

the

screen
Drive information
● Total Average*/Tank Average/Trip Average
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset, the vehicle was refueled, or the engine was started, respectively
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

● Range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with
the quantity of fuel remaining, the distance driven after the engine
was started or the distance since the function was reset, respectively.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

Instrument cluster

2 Press: Enters/Sets

102

2. Instrument cluster

● Current
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
● Average Speed*/Trip Average Speed
Displays the average since engine was started or the average since
the function was reset, respectively
● Total Time*/Trip Time
Displays the engine was started or the elapsed time since the function was reset, respectively
● Trip distance
Displays the distance since the engine was started
● Digital speedometer
● Display off
A blank screen is displayed

*: Resetting procedures:
• Select a function to be reset using the meter control switch and then
press and hold the center button to reset.
• If there is more than one function that can be reset, check boxes will be
displayed next to the functions.

Settings display
The settings of the following items can be changed, refer to P. 624.
For functions that can be enabled or disabled, the function switches
between on and off each time is

pressed.

● LDA (Lane Departure Alert)* (→P. 627)
• LDA Sensitivity
Select to set up the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) sensitivity.
• Sway warning
Select to enable/disable the Sway warning function.
• Sway warning sensitivity
Select to set up the sway warning sensitivity.

● PCS (Pre-Collision System)*1 (→P. 627)
• PCS
Select to enable/disable the PCS (Pre-Collision System) function.
• Sensitivity
Select to set up the PCS (Pre-Collision System) sensitivity.

2. Instrument cluster

103

● BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)*1 (→P. 627)
Select to enable/disable the Blind Spot Monitor function.
● RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)*1 (→P. 627)
Select to enable/disable the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.
● Vehicle Settings
• BSM Brightness*1 (→P. 627)
Select to set up the BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) outside rear view mirror
indicators brightness.
• RCTA volume*1 (→P. 627)

• TBC Trailer Type*1 (→P. 628)
Select to set up the trailer brake type.
• Maintenance reset*2 (→P. 477)
Select to reset the message after the required maintenance is performed.

Instrument cluster

Select to set up the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) warning buzzer volume.

104

2. Instrument cluster

● Meter setting
• Language
Select to change the language on the display.
• Units
Select to change the unit of measure for fuel consumption and temperature.
• Switch settings
You can register 1 screen as the top screen. To register, press and hold
while the desired screen is displayed.
There are also screens that cannot be setup as the Top Screen.
• Drive information 1 and 2
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a Drive information screen, up to 2 Drive information screens can be set.
• Pop-up display
Select to set the following pop-up displays, which may appear in some
situations, on/off.
• Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked system (if
equipped)
• Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system
• Instrument panel brightness adjustment display
• Accent color
Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the menu
icon color.
• Default settings
Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned to their
default setting.

*1: If equipped
*2: For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

2. Instrument cluster

105

Instrument cluster

■ Setting items
● “Vehicle Settings” and “Meter Settings” setting items are not selectable
during driving and cannot be operated.
Also, the settings screen is temporarily canceled in the following situations.
• When a warning message appears.
• When the vehicle begins to move.
● Settings for functions not equipped to the vehicle are not displayed.
● When a function is turned off, the related settings for that function are not
selectable.
■ Pop-up display
In some situations, such as when a switch operation is performed, a pop-up
display will be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The drive information will be reset.
■ Trip summary display
When the engine switch is turned off, each of the following will be displayed
on the multi-information display, and will clear after approximately 30 seconds.
● Distance traveled
● Average fuel consumption
● Driving range
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position. It may also take a few minutes
to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
● “---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined
due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may
also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.

106

2. Instrument cluster

WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
● When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra
attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle.
● Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as
you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the
vehicle.
■ Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that
the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting
up the display features.

2. Instrument cluster

107

Fuel consumption information∗
The fuel consumption information can be displayed on Entune
Audio, Entune Premium Audio and Entune Audio Plus screen.
Display the trip information or past record screen


Entune Audio

Press the “TRUCK” button.


Entune Premium Audio and Entune Audio Plus

Fuel consumption
■ Trip information

If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.
1 Resetting the consumption

data
2 Average vehicle speed since

the engine was started
3 Elapsed

time since
engine was started

the

4 Fuel consumption in the past

15 minutes
5 Cruising range (→P. 108)
6 Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by
color into past averages and averages attained since the engine
switch was last turned to the “ON” position. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
These images are examples only.

∗: If equipped

Instrument cluster

Press the “APPS” button, and then select “Eco” on the screen.

108

2. Instrument cluster

■ Past record

If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
1 Resetting the past record

data
2 Best recorded fuel consump-

tion
3 Average fuel consumption (if

equipped)
4 Previous fuel consumption

record
5 Current fuel economy
6 Update the average fuel consumption data

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past
averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
These images are examples only.
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■ Updating the past record data
Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the
current fuel consumption again.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a
result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

109

Operation of
each component
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................. 110
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors ......................... 114
Tailgate ............................. 118
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ........................ 123
Rear seats......................... 126
Driving position memory
(driver’s seat) .................. 128
Head restraints.................. 132
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel .................. 136
Inside rear view mirror....... 139
Outside rear view
mirrors............................. 142

3
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows ................. 147
Back window ..................... 150
Power back window .......... 151
Moon roof.......................... 154

110

3-1. Key information

Keys
The keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.


Vehicles without wireless remote control

1 Keys
2 Key number plate



Vehicles with wireless remote control

1 Keys
Operating the wireless remote control function

2 Key number plate

Wireless remote control (if equipped)
1 Locks all the doors (→P. 114)
2 Unlocks all the doors (→P. 114)
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 3 seconds unlocks the
other doors.

3 Sounds the alarm (press and

hold) (→P. 111)

3-1. Key information

111

■ If you lose your keys
New genuine key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other key and
the key number stamped on your key number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■ Panic mode (vehicles with wireless remote control)
When
is pressed for longer than about
1 second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into
or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
wireless remote control.

● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility
that generates strong radio waves
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device
● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
● When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a
personal computer
■ Key battery depletion (vehicles with wireless remote control)
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 516)
■ Replacing the battery (vehicles with wireless remote control)
→P. 516

Operation of each component

■ When riding in an aircraft (vehicles with wireless remote control)
When bringing a wireless key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press
any buttons on the wireless key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying a wireless key in your bag, etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to
be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the wireless key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■ Conditions affecting operation (vehicles with wireless remote control)
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following
situations.

112

3-1. Key information

■ Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles with wireless remote
control)
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: GQ4-52T
FCC ID: GQ4-49R
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

The FCC ID/IC Certification number is affixed inside the equipment. You can
find the ID/number when replacing the battery.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada’s license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The FCC ID/IC Certification number is affixed inside the equipment. You can
find the ID/number when replacing the battery.
NOTE:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:(1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même
si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

L’identification FCC/Ie numéro d’accréditation IC est apposé(e) à l’intérieur
de l’appareil.

3-1. Key information

113

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 624)
NOTICE

Operation of each component

■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer, etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

114

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors
Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

◆ Key
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors
Turning the key unlocks the
driver’s door. Turning the key
again unlocks the other doors.

Vehicles with moon roof:
3 Closes the moon roof (turn

and hold)
4 Opens the moon roof (turn and hold)

◆ Wireless remote control (if equipped)
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.

2 Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 3 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
■ Operation signals (vehicles with wireless remote control)
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ Door lock buzzer (vehicles with wireless remote control)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the
buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

115

■ Security feature (vehicles with wireless remote control)
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Alarm (if equipped)
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(→P. 85)

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside
■ Door lock switch

1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors


Driver’s door lock switch

1 Locks the door
2 Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.

Passenger’s door lock switch

Operation of each component

■ Inside lock buttons



116

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2 Close the door.

Vehicles with power door lock system:
The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and the
key is in the engine switch.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
1 Unlock
2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

117

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
Function

Operation

Shift position linked door locking Shifting the shift lever out of P locks
function
all the doors.
Shift position linked door unlocking Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks
function
all the doors.
Speed linked door locking function

All the doors are locked when the
vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.

WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out
of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Double Cab and CrewMax models: Set the rear door child-protector locks
when children are seated in the rear seats.

Operation of each component

All the doors are unlocked when the
Driver's door linked door unlocking driver's door is opened within 10 secfunction
onds after turning the engine switch to
the “LOCK” position.

118

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Tailgate
The tailgate can be opened using the tailgate handle. The tailgate can be locked/unlocked using a key.
Locking/unlocking the tailgate
1 Unlock the tailgate
2 Lock the tailgate

Opening/closing the tailgate
1 Pull the handle
2 Open the tailgate slowly
The support cables will hold the
tailgate horizontal.

3 Lift and close the tailgate
After closing the tailgate, try pulling
it toward you to make sure it is
securely locked.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

119

Removing the tailgate
■ Before removing the tailgate

These connector covers are used when removing the tailgate, to
prevent the back-up camera wire harness connectors from being
contaminated.
Connector cover (Gray)
Connector cover (White)
Store the connector covers in the
glove box in a plastic bag when not
using.
3

connectors (
depress small
connector 1
from connector

2 ),
and
plastic tab on
and pull apart
2 .

1 Tailgate wire harness con-

nector (White)
2 Frame wire harness connec-

tor (Gray)
2 Attach

the connector cover
(White) to the frame wire harness connector (Gray).
Connector cover (White)

2 Frame wire harness connec-

tor (Gray)

Operation of each component

1 To disconnect the wire harness

120

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

3 Open the tailgate.

4 Pull out the plastic wire protec-

tor located in the vehicle bed by
pressing the tabs and pulling
the protector.
Plastic wire protector

5 Pull out the wire harness from

the vehicle bed.

6 Attach

the connector cover
(Gray) to the tailgate wire harness connector (White).

1 Tailgate wire harness con-

nector (White)
Connector cover (Gray)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

121

■ Removing the tailgate
1 Open the tailgate to the angle

where you can release the
brackets on the support cables
from the lugs on both sides.
Lift the support cable bracket
up and slide it off.
To unhook the support cable
bracket, keep pulling up the clip on
the bracket and unhook the
bracket.
1 Support cable bracket

2 Clip

from vertical and pull up the
right side of the tailgate to
unhook the right side.

3 Tilt the tailgate up to 15°.

4 Slide the tailgate a little to the

right to unhook the left side.
To attach the tailgate, follow the
removal procedure in reverse
order.

Operation of each component

2 Tilt the tailgate to about 45°

122

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Rear step bumper
For rear end protection and easier
step-up loading.
To get on the rear step bumper,
use the shaded area in the illustration.

WARNING
■ Before removing the tailgate
Disconnect the wire harness between the back-up camera and the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle components.
■ Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious personal injury.
● Do not drive with the tailgate open.
● Do not allow others to get on the rear step bumper.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the tailgate wire harness
Do not pull out all of the tailgate wire harness before opening the tailgate.
■ To prevent damage to the camera lens
Store the removed tailgate with the back-up camera lens facing upward.
■ After closing the tailgate
Try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked.
■ To prevent damage to the rear step bumper
Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

123

Front seats
Adjustment procedure (separated type seats)
■ Driver’s seat

position

adjustment

switch
2 Seatback

angle adjustment

switch
3 Seat cushion length adjust-

ment switch (if equipped)

4 Seat

cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch

5 Seat vertical height adjust-

ment switch
6 Seat lumbar support adjust-

ment switch

■ Passenger’s seat


Manual seat

1 Seat position adjustment lever

2 Seatback

lever

angle adjustment

Operation of each component

1 Seat

124


3-3. Adjusting the seats

Power seat

1 Seat

position

adjustment

switch

3 Seat lumbar support adjust-

ment switch

2 Seatback

angle adjustment

switch
Adjustment procedure (bench type seats)

1 Seat

position

adjustment

levers
2 Seatback

levers

3 Center seat seatback angle

adjustment lever
angle adjustment

3-3. Adjusting the seats

125

■ Power easy access system (vehicles with driving position memory)
The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with engine switch
position and the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 128)
WARNING

Operation of each component

■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
■ Seat adjustment
● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Manual seat type only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
locked in position.
■ When adjusting the seat positions
Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

126

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Rear seats
Raising the bottom cushion
1 Use the seat belt hangers to

prevent the belts from being
tangled.

2 Pull and release the lever to

unlock while raising the bottom
cushion until it locks.
When returning the bottom
cushion to its original position,
pull and release the lever, then
carefully lower the bottom cushion using your other hand.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

127

WARNING

NOTICE
■ Before raising the bottom cushion
● Make sure that there are no objects, such as cushions, on the seat cushion.
● The seat belts must be stowed.

Operation of each component

■ When raising the bottom cushion
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not raise the bottom cushion while driving.
● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.
■ When bottom cushion is raised
Do not allow passengers to sit on raised bottom cushion or place anything
on storage box (Double Cab models) while driving.
■ When returning the seats to their original position
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
● Make sure the bottom cushions are securely locked.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seat.
● Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.
● Make sure that there are no objects under the seat cushion or on the loading floor.

128

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Driving position memory (driver’s seat)∗
This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences.
Power easy access system
The driver’s seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to
allow the driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.
When all of the following have
been performed, the driver’s seat
and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to a position that
allows driver to enter and exit the
vehicle easily.
• The shift lever has been shifted
to P.
• The key has been removed
from the engine switch.
• The driver’s seat belt has been
unfastened.
When any of the following has been performed, the driver’s seat and
steering wheel automatically return to their original positions.
• The key has been inserted into the engine switch.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.
■ Operation of the power easy access system
When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if
the seat is already close to the rearmost position, etc.
■ Customization
The seat movement amount settings of the power easy access system can
be customized. (Customizable features: →P. 624)

∗: If equipped

3-3. Adjusting the seats

129

Driving position memory
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be recorded and recalled
by pressing a button.
Two different driving positions can be recorded into memory.
■ Recording procedure
1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
3 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view

mirrors to the desired positions.
4 While

If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recall procedure
1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
3 Press one of the buttons for

the driving position you want
to recall until the buzzer
sounds.

Operation of each component

pressing the “SET”
button, or within 3 seconds
after the “SET” button is
pressed, press button “1” or
“2” until the buzzer sounds.

130

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through
Perform any of the following:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1” or “2”.
● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position
recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering
wheel position recall).
■ Seat positions that can be memorized (→P. 123)
The adjusted seat positions can be recorded except for lumbar support positions.
■ Operating the driving position memory after the key is removed from the
engine switch
Recorded seat positions (except the steering wheel position) can be activated
up to 30 seconds after the driver’s door is opened, even if the key is removed
from the engine switch.
■ In order to correctly use the driving position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is
operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different
when it is recalled.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

131

Memory recall function
A desired driving position can be recalled linked with the unlocking of
the door.
■ Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button “1” or “2” before performing
the following:
1 Turn the engine switch off and close the driver’s door.
2 While pressing the button “1”

or “2”, press
on the wireless remote control until the
signal beeps.

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, open and close a
door once after a driving position has been recorded. (If a door is
not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors will
be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(→P. 85)
■ Cancelation procedure
1 Turn the engine switch off and close the driver’s door.
2 While pressing the “SET” button, press

on the wireless

remote control until you hear 2 beeps.
■ If the battery is disconnected
The recorded seat positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear
passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

Operation of each component

The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is
unlocked using the wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.

132

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Rear seats
■ Center seat

1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.


Double Cab models

Lock release button



CrewMax models

Lock release button

3-3. Adjusting the seats

133

■ Outer seat

1 To use
Lift up the head restraint back to
the neutral position and then push
the head restraint down.

2 To fold
Lift up the head restraint while
pressing the right lock release button, and fold it forward.

Lock release button

■ Removing the head restraints
 Front seats and center rear seat (CrewMax models)

Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.

 Center rear seat (Double Cab models)

Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.

Lock release button
 Outer rear seat

Pull the head restraint up while pressing
both lock release buttons.

Lock release button

Operation of each component

Lock release button

134

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Installing the head restraints
 Front seats and center rear seat (CrewMax models)
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock
position. Press and hold the lock
release button when lowering the head
restraint.
Lock release button
 Center rear seat (Double Cab models)

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock
position. Press and hold the lock
release button when lowering the head
restraint.
Lock release button
 Outer rear seat

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock
position.

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

135

■ Adjusting the front center seat (bench type seat) and rear center seat
head restraints
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Operation of each component

136

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure (manually adjustable type)
1 Hold the steering wheel and

push the lever down.



Vehicles with front bench type seat

2 Adjust to the ideal position by

moving the steering wheel.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.



Vehicles with front separate type seats

2 Adjust to the ideal position by

moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

137

Adjustment procedure (power-adjustable type)
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
1 Up
2 Down
3 Toward the driver
4 Away from the driver

Horn

■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manual adjustable type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(→P. 136)

Operation of each component

To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.

138

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Auto tilt away (power-adjustable type)
When the key is removed from the
engine switch, the steering wheel
returns to its stowed position by
moving up and away to enable
easier driver enter and exit.
Inserting the key into the engine
switch returns the steering wheel
to its original position.
■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when (power adjustable type)
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (power adjustable type)
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory system. (→P. 128)
■ Power easy access system (vehicles with driving position memory)
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with engine switch
position and the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 128)
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manually adjustable type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

139

Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving
posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
3

Operation of each component

140

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Anti-glare function


Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced
by operating the lever.
1 Normal position
2 Anti-glare position



Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles
behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic
function mode

anti-glare

ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator
also turns off.)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

141

■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

■ If a sun visor interferes with the mirror
Hold and rotate the mirror to adjust the
support.

Operation of each component

WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.

142

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment procedure


Manually adjustable type

Adjust the mirror up and down, in
or out by pushing the mirror surface.



Power-adjustable type (type A)

1 To select a mirror to adjust,

press the switch.
1 Left
2 Right

2 To adjust the mirror, press the

switch.
1 Up
2 Right
3 Down
4 Left

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors


143

Power-adjustable type (type B)

Upper part mirror:
1 To select a mirror to adjust,

press the switch.
1 Left
2 Right

2 To adjust the mirror, press the

switch.
1 Up

2 Right
4 Left

Lower part mirror:
Adjust the mirror up and down, in
or out by pushing the mirror surface.

Folding the mirrors


From outside

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear.

Operation of each component

3 Down

144


3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

From inside (if equipped)

Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to extend them to
the original position.

Extending the mirrors (if equipped)
The mirrors can be manually slid
outward to improve visibility
around wide trailers.

Linked mirror function when reversing (if equipped)
When the mirror select switch is in the L or R position, the outside rear
view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is
reversing in order to give a better view of the ground.
To disable this function, move the mirror select switch to the neutral
position (between L and R).
■ Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing

With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position. The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift lever is
shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position (angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position
will also change.
When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

145

■ Recommended mirror angle when towing a trailer (vehicles with extending mirrors)
1 Power adjust the upper part of the mir-

ror until an appropriate view is obtained.
It is recommended that the outer 2/3 of
the upper mirror be filled with images
other than the vehicle and trailer.
2 Manually adjust the lower part of the

mirror until an appropriate view of the
towed object is obtained. It is recommended that the outer 2/3 of the lower
mirror be filled with images other than
the trailer.
3

Operation of each component

■ Mirror operating conditions (power-adjustable type)
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 414, 421)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position
memory)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (→P. 128)
■ Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside
rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (→P. 140)

146

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving (power-adjustable type)
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot
and burn you.

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

147

Power windows
Opening and closing procedures
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:


Type A

1 Closing
2 Opening
3 One-touch opening* (driver’s

window only)

*: To stop the window partway, oper-



Type B

1 Closing
2 One-touch closing* (front seat

windows)
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening* (front seat

windows)

*: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock the
passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

Operation of each component

ate the switch in the opposite direction.

148

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function (type B only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ When the power window does not close normally (type B only)
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on
the relevant door.
● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power
window switch in the one-touch closing position while the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
1

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

149

WARNING

Operation of each component

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the
operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in
the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use
the window lock switch. (→P. 147)
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function (type B only)
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.

150

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Back window∗
Opening and closing
Open/close
Push the lock release lever and
slide the back window.

■ Closing the back window
Make sure that the back window is securely closed after closing it.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the back window closed.
This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also
prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

∗: If equipped

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

151

Power back window∗
Opening and closing


Double Cab models

1 Opening
2 Closing

Operation of each component

∗: If equipped

152


3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

CrewMax models

1 Opening
2 Closing

■ The power back window can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Operating the power back windows after turning the engine off
The power back windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds after
the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot,
however, be operated once either front door is opened.

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

153

WARNING

Operation of each component

■ Closing the back window
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● The driver is responsible for all the power back window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power back
window. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts
caught in the power back window.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Caution while driving
Keep the back window closed.
This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also
prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

154

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof ∗
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and
tilt it up and down.
Opening and closing
1 Opens the moon roof *
2 Closes the moon roof *

*: Lightly

press either way of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.

Tilting up and down
1 Tilts the moon roof up*
2 Tilts the moon roof down*

*: Lightly

press either way of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.

■ The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch in the “ON” position.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 43 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon
roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens
slightly.

∗: If equipped

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

155

■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
The moon roof can be opened and closed using the key. (→P. 114)
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “ ▼ ” (sliding close) switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “UP” (tilt up) switch*1 until the moon roof moves into
the tilt up position and stops.

Release the “UP” (tilt up) switch once and then press and hold the “UP”
(tilt up) switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.

*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.
2

: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 seconds pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “ ▼ ”
(sliding close) or “UP” (tilt up) switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and
pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Operation of each component

● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.

156

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ Moon roof open reminder function
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display
in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s
door is opened with the moon roof open.
■ When the battery is disconnected
The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.
1

Push and hold the switch toward the “UP” (tilt up) side or “ ▼ ” (sliding
close) side.

After the moon roof will tilt up and down, release the switch.

To ensure the initialization is complete, make sure automatic opening and
closing functions work properly.

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 624)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

157

WARNING

Operation of each component

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations. In
order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● When using the key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof
after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger
having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a
child operate moon roof by the key. It is possible for children and other
passengers to get caught in the moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.

158

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

159

Driving

4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle............. 160
Cargo and luggage ........... 168
Vehicle load limits ............. 171
Trailer towing..................... 173
Dinghy towing ................... 194
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch ..... 195
Automatic transmission ..... 197
Turn signal lever................ 204
Parking brake .................... 205
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch ................ 206
Automatic High Beam ....... 211
Fog light switch ................. 216
Windshield wipers and
washer ............................ 217
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap .................................. 220

4
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense P ..... 224
PCS (Pre-Collision
System)........................... 231
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) ............................... 244
Dynamic radar cruise
control ............................. 252
Cruise control.................... 266
Intuitive parking assist....... 270
Rear view monitor
system ............................ 277
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) ........ 286
Four-wheel drive system... 296
AUTO LSD system............ 299
Driving assist systems ...... 301
Trailer brake controller ...... 308
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips ............. 312
Off-road precautions ......... 316

160

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe
driving:
Starting the engine
→P. 195
Driving
1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 197)
2 Release the parking brake. (→P. 205)
3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelera-

tor pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2 If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to P or N. (→P. 197)

Parking the vehicle
1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2 Set the parking brake (→P. 205), and shift the shift lever to P

(→P. 197).
3 Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.
4 Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Starting off on a steep uphill
1 Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
3 Release the parking brake.

4-1. Before driving

161

Driving

■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to
meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
● When the brake pedal is depressed while TOW/HAUL mode is selected (if
equipped)
■ Restraining the engine output (Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the
engine output may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the
system is operating.
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)
● When the following unusual operation is performed, the engine output may
be restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to
R (D includes S) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on the multi-information display.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed too much while the vehicle is in
reverse.
● While Drive-Start Control is being activated, your vehicle may have trouble
escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In such case, perform the following
actions to cancel Drive-Start Control so that the vehicle may become able to
escape from the mud or fresh snow.
• Deactivate TRAC (→P. 304)
• When the AUTO LSD system is turned on. (→P. 299)
• 4WD models: The four-wheel drive control switch is in “4L” position.
(→P. 296)

162

4-1. Before driving

■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake
system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the
parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 610)
■ When turning off the engine
The emission system operating sounds may continue for a short time after
the engine is turned off. This is not a malfunction, and helps to ensure optimal
performance of the emission system.

4-1. Before driving

163

WARNING

Driving

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to difficulty
in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 539
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (→P. 197)
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle.

164

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving
backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to moving
unexpectedly of the vehicle that may cause an accident.

4-1. Before driving

165

WARNING

Driving

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may move suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the
parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may rupture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s
electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

166

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not
set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● 4WD models: If the shift lever is moved before the “4LO” indicator turns
on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and
allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the
indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in
P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the
shifting of the transfer mode. (→P. 296)
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

4-1. Before driving

167

NOTICE

Driving

■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the engine output.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may move suddenly if the
accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P. 565)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain, etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, transfer (4WD models) differentials, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

168

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) − (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle. (→P. 171)

4-1. Before driving

169

Calculation formula for your vehicle
1 Cargo capacity
2 Total

load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (→P. 594)

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in
your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight)
of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) − A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced
E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) − D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)

*4: D = Additional weight of people
*5: E = Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.

Driving

*1: A = Weight of people
*2: B = Total load capacity
*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load

170

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly,
may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or
passengers, possibly causing an accident.
● Do not stack anything behind the front seats higher than the seatbacks.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• On the auxiliary box or tray that has no lid
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the rear deck. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly
fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or
an accident.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.

4-1. Before driving

171

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P. 594
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.

◆ Seating capacity
Vehicles with front separated type seats —
5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Vehicles with front bench type seat —
6 occupants (Front 3, Rear 3)

Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do
not exceed the total load capacity.

◆ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): →P. 177
TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

◆ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(→P. 507)

Driving

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

172

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering
and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

4-1. Before driving

173

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on
handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are
using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment
has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you
employ the requisite driving habits. (→P. 192)
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by
trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes,
the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction
caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

Driving

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in
accordance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating
conditions.

174

4-1. Before driving

Towing related terms
■ GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum
of the total vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
weight of the trailer being towed
(including the cargo in the
trailer).
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of
the vehicle. When towing a
trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross
axle weight. The gross axle
weight is the load placed on
each axle (front and rear).

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

4-1. Before driving

175

■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the
cargo in the trailer.

(With brakes)

TWR is calculated assuming
base vehicle with one driver,
one front passenger, towing
package (if available), hitch and
hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will
reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and
GAWR.
If the gross trailer weight exceeds 3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended
to use a trailer with 2 or more axles.

■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

■ Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer
hitch ball. (→P. 183)

(Without brakes)

Driving

The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake system.

176

4-1. Before driving

■ Kingpin Weight

The load placed on the 5th
wheel mount or the gooseneck
ball. (→P. 184)

Weight limits
● The gross trailer weight must never exceed the TWR described in
the table. (→P. 177)
● The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR
described in the table. (→P. 177)
● The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification Label.
● The gross axle weight on each
axle must never exceed the
GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.
● If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service
brakes are required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control
device with sufficient capacity is required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing hitch with sufficient capacity is required.

177

4-1. Before driving

GCWR, TWR, Unbraked TWR, Fifth wheel and Gooseneck towing
TWR
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the
limits.
■ GCWR*5 and TWR*5


Double Cab models

Model code*1
UPK51LCRTSKA
UPK56LCRTSKA

Engine

1UR-FE
engine

Driving
Bed type
system

GCWR

TWR

2WD

12500 lb.
(5670 kg)

6800 lb.
(3080 kg)

4WD

12500 lb.
(5670 kg)

6500 lb.
(2945 kg)

16000 lb.
10200 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4625 kg)*3
16000 lb.
10100 lb.
(7255 kg)*4 (4580 kg)*4

3UR-FE
engine
USK51LCRTLKA

Driving

USK51LCRTSKA

14000 lb.
8300 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3760 kg)*2

Standard
2WD

14000 lb.
8200 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3715 kg)*2
16000 lb.
10200 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4625 kg)*3
16000 lb.
10100 lb.
(7255 kg)*4 (4580 kg)*4
14000 lb.
8300 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3760 kg)*2

USK51LCRTSGA

3UR-FBE
engine

16000 lb.
10200 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4625 kg)*3
16000 lb.
10100 lb.
(7255 kg)*4 (4580 kg)*4

*5:

These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE
International per SAE J2807.

178

4-1. Before driving

Model code*1

Engine

Driving
Bed type
system

GCWR

TWR

14000 lb.
8200 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3715 kg)*2
USK51LCRTLGA

3UR-FBE
engine

Standard

16000 lb.
10200 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4625 kg)*3
16000 lb.
10100 lb.
(7255 kg)*4 (4580 kg)*4
14000 lb.
8100 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3670 kg)*2

USK52LCHTSKA

3UR-FE
engine

16000 lb.
10100 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4580 kg)*3

2WD

Long

USK52LCHTSGA

3UR-FBE
engine

16000 lb.
10000 lb.
(7255 kg)*4 (4535 kg)*4
14000 lb.
8100 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3670 kg)*2
16000 lb.
10100 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4580 kg)*3
16000 lb.
10000 lb.
(7255 kg)*4 (4535 kg)*4
14000 lb.
8000 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3625 kg)*2

USK56LCRTSKA

16000 lb.
9900 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4490 kg)*3
3UR-FE
engine

USK56LCRTLKA

4WD

Standard

15900 lb.
9700 lb.
(7210 kg)*4 (4395 kg)*4
14000 lb.
7900 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3580 kg)*2
16000 lb.
9900 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4490 kg)*3
15400 lb.
9100 lb.
(6985 kg)*4 (4125 kg)*4

179

4-1. Before driving

Model code*1

Engine

Driving
Bed type
system

GCWR

TWR

14000 lb.
7800 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3535 kg)*2
USK57LCHTSKA

3UR-FE
engine

Long

16000 lb.
9800 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4445 kg)*3
15700 lb.
9300 lb.
(7120 kg)*4 (4215 kg)*4
14000 lb.
8000 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3625 kg)*2

USK56LCRTSGA

16000 lb.
9900 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4490 kg)*3

4WD

14000 lb.
7900 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3580 kg)*2
16000 lb.
9900 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4490 kg)*3

3UR-FBE
engine

15400 lb.
9100 lb.
(6985 kg)*4 (4125 kg)*4
14000 lb.
7800 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3535 kg)*2
USK57LCHTSGA

Long

16000 lb.
9800 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4445 kg)*3
15700 lb.
9300 lb.
(7120 kg)*4 (4215 kg)*4

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 600)
*2: Vehicles without towing package
*3: Vehicles with towing package
*4: Vehicles with towing package and large fuel tank

Driving

USK56LCRTLGA

Standard

15900 lb.
9700 lb.
(7210 kg)*4 (4395 kg)*4

180

4-1. Before driving



CrewMax models

Model code*1
UPK51LPSTSKA
UPK56LPSTSKA

Engine

1UR-FE
engine

Driving
Bed type
system

GCWR

TWR

2WD

12500 lb.
(5670 kg)

6700 lb.
(3035 kg)

4WD

12500 lb.
(5670 kg)

6400 lb.
(2900 kg)

14000 lb.
8100 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3670 kg)*2
USK51LPSTSKA

16000 lb.
10100 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4580 kg)*3
16000 lb.
9900 lb.
(7255 kg)*4 (4490 kg)*4
14000 lb.
8000 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3625 kg)*2

USK51LPSTLKA

3UR-FE
engine

16000 lb.
10000 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4535 kg)*3
15600 lb.
9400 lb.
(7075 kg)*4 (4260 kg)*4
Short

USK51LPSTZKA

2WD

8000 lb.
14000 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3625 kg)*2
16000 lb.
10000 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4535 kg)*3
15600 lb.
9400 lb.
(7075 kg)*4 (4260 kg)*4
14000 lb.
8100 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3670 kg)*2

USK51LPSTSGA

16000 lb.
10100 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4580 kg)*3
3UR-FBE
engine

USK51LPSTLGA

16000 lb.
9900 lb.
(7255 kg)*4 (4490 kg)*4
8000 lb.
14000 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3625 kg)*2
16000 lb.
10000 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4535 kg)*3
15600 lb.
9400 lb.
(7075 kg)*4 (4260 kg)*4

181

4-1. Before driving

Model code*1

Engine

Driving
Bed type
system

GCWR

TWR

14000 lb.
8000 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3625 kg)*2
USK51LPSTZGA

3UR-FBE
engine

16000 lb.
10000 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4535 kg)*3

2WD

15600 lb.
9400 lb.
(7075 kg)*4 (4260 kg)*4
14000 lb.
7800 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3535 kg)*2
USK56LPSTSKA

16000 lb.
9800 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4445 kg)*3
15600 lb.
9200 lb.
(7075 kg)*4 (4170 kg)*4
14000 lb.
7800 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3535 kg)*2
3UR-FE
engine

Short

4WD

USK56LPSTZKA

16000 lb.
9800 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4445 kg)*3
15200 lb.
8800 lb.
(6890 kg)*4 (3990 kg)*4
14000 lb.
7800 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3535 kg)*2
16000 lb.
9800 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4445 kg)*3
15200 lb.
8800 lb.
(6890 kg)*4 (3990 kg)*4
14000 lb.
7800 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3535 kg)*2

USK56LPSTSGA

3UR-FBE
engine

16000 lb.
9800 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4445 kg)*3
15600 lb.
9200 lb.
(7075 kg)*4 (4170 kg)*4

Driving

USK56LPSTLKA

182

4-1. Before driving

Model code*1

Engine

Driving
Bed type
system

GCWR

TWR

14000 lb.
7800 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3535 kg)*2
USK56LPSTLGA

16000 lb.
9800 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4445 kg)*3
3UR-FBE
engine

4WD

USK56LPSTZGA

Short

15200 lb.
8800 lb.
(6890 kg)*4 (3990 kg)*4
14000 lb.
7800 lb.
(6350 kg)*2 (3535 kg)*2
16000 lb.
9800 lb.
(7255 kg)*3 (4445 kg)*3
15200 lb.
8800 lb.
(6890 kg)*4 (3990 kg)*4

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 600)
*2: Vehicles without towing package
*3: Vehicles with towing package
*4: Vehicles with towing package and large fuel tank
■ Unbraked TWR*5
1000 lb. (453 kg)

*5: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE
International per SAE J2807.

4-1. Before driving

183

Trailer Tongue Weight and Trailer Kingpin Weight
● A recommended tongue weight or kingpin weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.
● To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must
be loaded by referring to the following instructions.
1.Conventional Towing
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue Weight/Gross trailer weight x 100
= 9% to 11%)
1 Gross trailer weight
2 Tongue Weight

If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the
front fender height above the front axle before connection. Adjust
weight distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the
same height as before connection.
Do not reduce front fender height below original measurement.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight
can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk
yard, etc.

Driving

If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front
axle to the same weight as before the trailer connection.

184

4-1. Before driving

2.Fifth wheel Towing or Gooseneck Towing
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the kingpin
weight is 14% to 16%. (Kingpin weight/Gross trailer weight x 100
= 14% to 16%)
1 Gross trailer weight
2 Kingpin weight

The gross trailer weight and kingpin weight can be measured
with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
CrewMax models: Current fifth wheel trailer designs are not compatible with short bed.
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your vehicle.
● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
● Lubricate the hitch ball and kingpin with a light coating of grease.
● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

185

4-1. Before driving

Bumper towing (vehicles with steel bumper only)
The rear bumper of your vehicle is
equipped with a hole to install a
trailer ball. If you have any questions, contact your Toyota dealer.
The gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus cargo weight) when
towing with the bumper must never
exceed the TWR (→P. 177) or
5000 lb. (2268 kg) whichever is
lower.

Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
1 Trailer ball load rating
4

Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.

Driving

2 Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.

Trailer class
Typical trailer ball size

II and III

2 5/16 in.

2 in.

1 7/8 in.

3 Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut by at least 2
threads.

4 Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.

186

4-1. Before driving

Positions for towing hitch receiver
1 Hitch receiver pin hole position:

46.4 in. (1179 mm)

Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness stored in the rear end of the vehicle.
The tow lighting system is designed for 64 watts/5 amps of electrical
current per side (right and left) for the trailer brake/turn light functions.
Please contact your Toyota dealer with any questions or concerns.


Vehicles without towing package



Vehicles with towing package

■ Service connector for towing brake controllers (vehicles without an
installed trailer brake controller)
Your vehicle is equipped with a service
connector for supplemental trailer brake
controllers.
Please consult your dealer on how to
access the service connector.

4-1. Before driving

187

Trailer towing tips

Driving

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. To help avoid
an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when
towing:
● Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not
exceed the posted towing speed limit.
● Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph
(104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the
posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set
forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability
of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as
speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
● Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicletrailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel
of the vehicle-trailer combination.
● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing
without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)
of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.

188

4-1. Before driving

● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or
slippery surfaces.
● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making
a turn.
● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making
a wider than normal turning radius.
● Slow down before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery
surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of
your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing
lanes.
● To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance when using engine braking, do not use the transmission in
D.
Transmission shift range position must be in 4 in the S mode.
● Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long
downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes
too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving
up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge
indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in
use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(→P. 585)

4-1. Before driving

189

● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do
so only after performing the following:
1 Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2 Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and

trailer’s wheels.
3 When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly

until the blocks absorb the load.
4 Apply the parking brake firmly.
5 Shift into P and turn off the engine.

● When restarting after parking on a slope:
1 With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the

brake pedal pressed.

2 Shift into D or R (if reversing).

back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
4 Have someone retrieve the blocks.

Driving

3 Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or

190

4-1. Before driving

■ Trailer brake controller
→P. 308
■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height
No matter which class of tow hitch
applies, for a more safe trailer hookup,
the trailer ball setup must be the proper
height for the coupler on the trailer.

1 Coupler
2 Trailer ball

■ Before towing
Check that the following conditions are met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (→P. 607)
● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.
● All trailer lights work as required by law.
● All lights work each time you connect them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight,
overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or
local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
● Depress TOW/HAUL button (if equipped). (→P. 200)
● The manual headlight leveling dial is correctly adjusted. (→P. 208)

4-1. Before driving

191

Driving

■ Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components
(such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for
over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start
towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed
of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle
acceleration.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. (See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide”/“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately
600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can
adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize. (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to
stabilize the vehicle and trailer.)
● After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred
is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the
towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.

192

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
■ Trailer towing precautions
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance
with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability
and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and
performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing
a trailer.
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device
with sufficient capacity is required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing
hitch with sufficient capacity is required.
● Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads
as close to the trailer axle as possible.
● Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the
speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual,
whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery surface, etc., to help avoid an accident. If you
experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow
down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of
which you experience the instability.
● Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
● Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
● Do not use cruise control when towing.
● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long
downhill grades.
● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before
descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill
grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the
brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result
in reduced braking efficiency.
● Do not tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is installed on your vehicle.

4-1. Before driving

193

WARNING

NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage
your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.
■ When towing a fifth wheel trailer
Be careful not to hit the cabin or bed with
the trailer while making a sharp turn.

Driving

■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the
hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of
towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight
rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum
weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight
rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting
in death or serious personal injuries.
■ When towing a trailer
Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are
required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

194

4-1. Before driving

Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels
on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

4-2. Driving procedures

195

Engine (ignition) switch
Starting the engine
1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.
4 Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine.

Changing the engine switch positions
1 “LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked and
the key can be removed. (The key
can be removed only when the
shift lever is in P.)

2 “ACC”

3 “ON”
All electrical components can be used.
4 “START”
For starting the engine.
■ Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
1

Shift the shift lever to P.

Push in the key and turn it to the
“LOCK” position.

■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 76)
Contact your Toyota dealer.

Driving

Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.

196

4-2. Driving procedures

■ When the steering lock cannot be released
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly left and
right.

■ Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position to remind you to remove the key.
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn
the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident
may result if the engine is stopped while driving. (→P. 539)

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods of time without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

4-2. Driving procedures

197

Automatic transmission
Shifting the shift lever


Floor shift type

lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Driving

While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the shift

198


4-2. Driving procedures

Column shift type

While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the shift
lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift position purpose
Shift position

Function

Parking the vehicle/starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)

Normal driving*1

S mode driving*2 (→P. 199)

*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.

Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible
gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary
upshifting.

4-2. Driving procedures

199

Selecting shift ranges in the S position
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can be selected
by operating the shift lever, allowing you to drive in the shift range of
your choosing. The shift range can be selected by the shift lever.


Floor shift type



Column shift type

Driving

1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting

The selected shift range, from 1 to 6, will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to 5 or 4 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 or
2 if the AI-SHIFT (→P. 201) has operated while the shift lever was in
the D position.

200

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Shift ranges and their functions

● Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
● You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine
braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and
engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine
revolutions will also increase.
TOW/HAUL switch (vehicles with towing package)
Use TOW/HAUL mode when pulling a trailer or hauling a heavy load.
Press the TOW/HAUL switch. The indicator will come on.
Press the switch once more to cancel the mode.


Floor shift type



Column shift type

4-2. Driving procedures

201

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.

Depress the brake pedal.

Driving

■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to the driver performance and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
■ When driving with cruise control activated (if equipped)
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and downshifting to 5 or 4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (→P. 252, 266)
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift
lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is being depressed.
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may
be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:

202
4

4-2. Driving procedures

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

 Floor

shift type

 Column-shift

type

Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

 Floor

shift type

 Column-shift

type

4-2. Driving procedures

203

■ If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to
S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer, immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when
the shift lever is in D.)
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ Transmission protection function
If the tires spin continually when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or
snow, the automatic transmission temperature may become too high and
cause damage.
To avoid the damaging the automatic transmission, the system may temporarily lock the gear in 1st.
If the automatic transmission temperature falls, the gear locking is canceled
and returns the automatic transmission to the normal operation.

WARNING
Driving

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking
brake and depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal
when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted
out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.

204

4-2. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right (move

the lever partway and release
it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.

3 Lane change to the left (move

the lever partway and release
it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.

4 Left turn

■ Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.

4-2. Driving procedures

205

Parking brake
To set the parking brake, fully
depress the parking brake pedal
with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right
foot.
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)

U.S.A. Canada

■ Parking the vehicle
→P. 160
■ Usage in winter time
→P. 313

NOTICE
Driving

■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.

206

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:


For U.S.A.

The headlights, daytime
running lights (→P. 209)
and all the lights listed
above turn on and off
automatically.
(When
the engine switch is in
the “ON” position.)

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate,
instrument panel lights,
and daytime running
lights (→P. 209) turn on.

The headlights and all
lights
listed
above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.

The daytime running lights turn off.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers


207

For Canada
Off
The daytime running
lights turn on. (→P. 209)

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate,
instrument panel lights,
and daytime running
lights (→P. 209) turn on.

The headlights and all
lights
listed
above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.

The headlights, daytime
running lights (→P. 209)
and all the lights listed
above turn on and off
automatically.
(When
the
engine
switch is in the “ON”
position.)

Driving

208

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning on the high beam headlights
1 With the headlights on, push

the lever away from you to turn
on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.

2 Pull the lever toward you and

release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

Manual headlight leveling dial
The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.
1 Raises the level of the head-

lights
2 Lowers the level of the head-

lights

■ Guide to dial settings
Loading condition
Towing Hitch
(Towing
package)

Payload

None

Control switch position
Double Cab

CrewMax

Standard

Long

Short

None

Maximum
load

2.5

Maximum
load

None

3.5

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

209

■ Daytime running light system
● The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking
lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights.
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving,
the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following
conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at
night.)
• The engine is running
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the
(Canada only),
or
* position

*: When the surroundings are bright

The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the
windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

Driving

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking
brake is set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the
switch.
● For the Canada: Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve
fuel economy.
■ Headlight control sensor (vehicles with automatic headlight system)

210

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened and closed if the engine switch is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position. (The lights turn off immediately if the
button
on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
engine switch is tuned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Vehicles with automatic headlight system: If any of the doors is kept open, the
lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or turn
the light switch off once and then back to
or
.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the key is removed from the engine switch and the
driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (automatic light off system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 624)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

211

Automatic High Beam∗
The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to
assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles
ahead etc., and automatically turns the high beam on or off as
necessary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if
necessary.
■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.

Driving

Activating the Automatic High Beam system
1 Push the lever away from you

with the headlight switch in the
or
position.

2 Press

the Automatic
Beam switch.

High

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the headlights are turned on automatically
to indicate that the system is
active.

∗: If equipped

212

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning the high beam on/off manually
■ Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to the original
position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to
activate the Automatic High
Beam system again.

■ Switching to high beam

Press the Automatic
Beam switch.

High

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high
beam indicator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the
Automatic High Beam system
again.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

213

Driving

■ High beam automatic turning on or off conditions
● When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second):
• Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned off:
• Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
■ Camera sensor detection information
● The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut off in front of by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road
dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on wide road
• When vehicles ahead have no lights
● The high beam may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights
without using the headlights is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs
may cause the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to
remain on.
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high
beam on or off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface,
etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of luggage

214

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

● The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.
● Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.
● In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately
detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to
remain on or the high beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles
ahead or other parties. In these cases, manually switch between the high
and low beams.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
• The camera sensor temperature is extremely high.
• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights
or fog lights.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are
changing color, or are not aimed properly.
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and
darkness.
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or
roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved
roads, gravel tracks, etc.).
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding
road.
• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or
a mirror.
• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a
truck.
• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty.
• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.
• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in
an abnormal manner.
• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

215

■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
1

Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.
• The headlight switch is in
or
.
• The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.
• Automatic High Beam switch is on.

Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.

Within 30 seconds after 2 , repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the
original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 10 times,
then leave the lever in high beam position.

If the sensitivity is changed, the Automatic High Beam indicator is turn on
and off 3 times.

Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.
■ If “Headlight System Malfunction. Visit Your Dealer.” is displayed on the
multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.

Driving

216

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Fog light switch∗
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.
1

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Turns the front fog lights
off

Turns the front fog lights
on

■ Fog lights can be used when
The parking lights are on or the headlights are on in low beam.

∗: If equipped

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

217

Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the wiper lever
Operate the lever as follows to operate the wipers.


Vehicles without intermittent type

(U.S.A.) or
Off

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Low speed windshield
wiper operation

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
High speed windshield
wiper operation

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Temporary operation

Driving

5 Washer operation

(Canada)

218


4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Vehicles with intermittent type

(U.S.A.) or
Off

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Intermittent
windshield
wiper operation

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Low speed windshield
wiper operation

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
High speed windshield
wiper operation

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Temporary operation

(Canada)

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is
selected.
6 Increases the intermittent wind-

shield wiper frequency
7 Decreases

the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency

8 Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

219

■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
4

Driving

■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

220

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
● Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
● Confirm the type of fuel. (→P. 601)
Opening the fuel tank cap
1 Open the fuel filler door.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

open, and hang the fuel tank
cap on the back of the fuel filler
door.

4-4. Refueling

221

Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.

Driving

■ Fuel types
(→P. 601)
■ E85 Fueling Stations (Flex-fuel vehicles)
E85 fueling stations and fuel pumps can be identified by the indication “E85
85% Ethanol”. For more information about fueling stations, please refer to the
U.S. Department of Energy Web site.
http://www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/
■ Refueling (Flex-fuel vehicles)
Observe the following precautions when switching fuels, in order to maintain
starting and driving performance.
● Do not change fuels when the fuel level is 1/4 or less.
● Always add at least 2.6 gal. (10 L) of fuel.
● After filling up with fuel, warm up the engine or drive the vehicle for at least 5
minutes or 7 miles (11 km).
● Do not accelerate rapidly immediately after refueling.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ Closing the fuel tank cap
Tighten the fuel tank cap until 1 click is heard. Otherwise a malfunction indicator lamp may come on.

222

4-4. Refueling

WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.

4-4. Refueling

223

NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.
■ E85 fuel
E85 fuel can be used only in flex-fuel vehicles. Do not add E85 fuel to a
gasoline-engine vehicle.
Filling a gasoline-engine vehicle with E85 fuel will have a negative impact
on starting and driving performance and will cause damage to the fuel system components.

Driving

224

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense P∗
The Toyota Safety Sense P consists of the following drive assist
systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)∗
→P. 231

◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)∗
→P. 244

◆ Automatic High Beam∗
→P. 211

◆ Dynamic radar cruise control∗
→P. 252
WARNING
■ Toyota Safety Sense P
The Toyota Safety Sense P is designed to operate under the assumption
that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to
the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in
normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The
driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely.

∗: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

225

Vehicle data recording
The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer
that will record certain data, such as:
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was
operating)
The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or
images of the inside of the vehicle.
● Data usage

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the
lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific
vehicle or vehicle owner
● Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.
The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates
will not be available.

Driving

Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose
malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve
quality.

226

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Sensors
Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield,
detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.
1 Radar sensor
2 Camera sensor

WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to
an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.
1 Radar sensor
2 Front grille emblem

If the front of the radar sensor or the
front or back of the front grille emblem
is dirty or covered with water droplets,
snow, etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not
mark or damage them.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

227

WARNING

● Do not attach objects, such as stickers,
transparent stickers, and so forth, to the
outer side of the windshield in front of
the camera sensor (shaded area in the
illustration).
A: From the top of the windshield to
approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the
bottom of the camera sensor
B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)
(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the
right and left from the center of the camera sensor)

Driving

● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or
other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a
strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding
area.
● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and
installed, or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to
an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets,
snow, etc., clear the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from
the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed
is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.

228

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or
covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove
the fog, condensation or ice. (→P. 414, 421)
● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the
wiper insert or wiper blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or
remove it.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the
hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

229

■ Certification

Driving

230

4-5. Using the driving support systems

231

PCS (Pre-Collision System)∗
The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle.
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to
urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake
pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the
system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with
a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the
impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning
timing can be changed. (→P. 235)

Driving

∗: If equipped

232

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, a buzzer will
sound and a warning message
will be displayed on the multiinformation display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.

◆ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to
how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

◆ Pre-collision braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes
are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the
collision speed.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

233

WARNING

Driving

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations
under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen
collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve
the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: →P. 238
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →P. 240
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as
the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of
braking force will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are
performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine
that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating,
operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of
the pre-collision braking function.

234

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
■ When to disable the pre-collision system
In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires
are allowed to rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to
an accident or other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle

235

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing settings of the pre-collision system
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system

The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on the
multi-information display as following:
The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
1 Press “<” or “>” of meter control switches and select

2 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “PCS”, and

press

3 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “PCS”, and

press

to select the desired setting (on/off).
4

Driving

If the system is disabled, the
PCS warning light will turn on
and a message will be displayed on the multi-information
display.

236

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing

The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on the multi-information display as following:
The operation timing setting is retained when the engine switch is
turned off.
1 Press “<” or “>” of meter control switches and select

2 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “PCS”, and

press

3 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “Sensitivity”,

and press

to select the desired setting.

1 Far
The warning will begin to
operate earlier than with the
default timing.

2 Middle
This is the default setting.
3 Near
The warning will begin to
operate later than with the
default timing.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

237

The pre-collision system detects pedestrians based on the size, profile, and motion
of a detected object. However, a pedestrian may not be detected depending on
the surrounding brightness and the
motion, posture, and angle of the
detected object, preventing the system
from operating properly. (→P. 242)

Driving

■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.
Each function is operational at the following speeds:
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).
(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and
50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h).
(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and
50 mph [30 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).
(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and
50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)
● If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)
■ Pedestrian detection function

238

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Cancellation of the pre-collision braking
If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that
there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle
that is making a left/right turn

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a
right/left turn

• When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a
winding road

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility
poles, trees, or walls

4-5. Using the driving support systems

239

• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian,
or object by the roadside at the
entrance of a curve

• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a
tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a
protrusion on the road surface or roadside
• When
a
crossing
pedestrian
approaches very close to the vehicle

• When passing under an object (billboard, etc.) at the top of an uphill road

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier,
or other barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash

Driving

• When passing through a place with a
low structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic sign, etc.)

240

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When driving through or under
objects that may contact the vehicle,
such as thick grass, tree branches, or
a banner

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc., from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a vehicle or pedestrian
• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large
truck or guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant,
or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be
present
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by
the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating
properly:
• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear
end, such as a low bed trailer

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle

4-5. Using the driving support systems

241

• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving,
acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly
in front of your vehicle

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or
lowered

•
•
•
•
•
•

If the wheels are misaligned
If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
The vehicle is wobbling.
The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
When driving on a hill
If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned

Driving

• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a
sandstorm
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc., from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming
traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor
• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at
night or in a tunnel
• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/
right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding

242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be
obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when
the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively
worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface
● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar
sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc.,
hiding part of their body
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• Groups of pedestrians which are close together
• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright
• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or
brightness as their surroundings
• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)
on the road
• Pedestrians who are walking fast
• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly
• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object
• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside
rear view mirror, etc.)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

243

Driving

■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates, and a warning message is
displayed on the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a
malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will
disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating
conditions return:
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot, such as in the sun
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment
• When the radar sensor or front grille emblem is dirty or covered with
snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged
up or covered with condensation or ice
(Defogging the windshield: →P. 414, 421)
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a
sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or illuminate, or the warning message does not disappear, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (→P. 304), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision
braking functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

244

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)∗
Summary of functions
When driving on roads with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the
driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane.
The LDA system recognizes visible white (yellow) lines with the
camera sensor on the upper portion of the front windshield.

Functions included in LDA system

◆ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane, a warning is displayed on the multi-information
display and the warning buzzer
sounds to alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer
sounds, check the surrounding
road situation and carefully
operate the steering wheel to
move the vehicle back to the
center of the lane.

∗: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

245

◆ Vehicle sway warning
When the vehicle is swaying or
appears as if it may depart from
its lane multiple times, the
warning buzzer sounds and a
message is displayed on the
multi-information display to alert
the driver.

Driving

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
■ Before using LDA system
Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be
paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full
responsibility for driving safely by always paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of
the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such
as from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LDA system by mistake
When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system
Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc., are equipped.
● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are
present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc., are present due to
road repair.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction
work.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

247

WARNING
■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by
mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc., on the surface of the
lights.
● Do not modify the suspension, etc. If the suspension, etc., needs to be
replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Turning LDA system on
Press the LDA switch to turn the
LDA system on.
4

Driving

The LDA indicator illuminates and
a message is displayed on the
multi-information display.
Press the LDA switch again to turn
the LDA system off.
When the LDA system is turned on
or off, operation of the LDA system
continues in the same condition
the next time the engine is started.

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Indications on multi-information display
1 LDA indicator
The illumination condition of the
indicator informs the driver of the
system operation status.
Illuminated in green:
LDA system is operating.
Flashing in yellow:
Lane departure alert function is
operating.

2 Lane departure alert function

display
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information
screen.


Inside of displayed white lines
is white

Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When
the vehicle departs from its lane,
the white line displayed on the
side the vehicle departs from
flashes orange.



Inside of displayed white lines
is black

Indicates that the system is not
able to recognize white (yellow)
lines or is temporarily canceled.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

249

■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LDA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius
of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 251)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

Driving

• Setting for “
Warning” in
screen of the multi-information display is
set to on. (→P. 101)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 251)
■ Temporary cancellation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily
canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation
of the function is automatically restored. (→P. 249)
■ Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road
The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines
could not be recognized.

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow)
lines and various functions may not operate normally.
● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white
(yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front
of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement
marker” or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand,
etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than
lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly,
such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc., enters the
camera.
● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having
improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road seams).
● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the
beam axis has deviated.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

251

■ Warning message
If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the
driver of the need for caution while driving. (→P. 555)
■ Customization
The following settings can be changed.
Function

Setting details

Lane departure alert function

Adjust alert sensitivity

Vehicle sway warning

Turn function on and off
Adjust alert sensitivity

For how to change settings, refer to P. 624.
4

Driving

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Dynamic radar cruise control∗
Summary of functions
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically
accelerates and decelerates to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control with on freeways and highways.
● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (→P. 255)
● Constant speed control mode (→P. 261)
1 Vehicle-to-vehicle

distance

switch
2 Display
3 Indicators
4 Set speed
5 Cruise control switch

∗: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

253

WARNING

Driving

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the
system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control provides driving assistance to reduce the
driver’s burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road
conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking
the set speed.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition
observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert,
assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying on this system
or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance
provided by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in
determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a
designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in
low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of
judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain
vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in
any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has limited capability to prevent or avoid
a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any
danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle
and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button
when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up
and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc., on the front surface of the radar sensor or
camera sensor
● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

4-5. Using the driving support systems

255

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current
vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.

Driving

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

1 Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-tovehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

2 Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed
appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is
necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at
this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle
ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

3 Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower
than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

257

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
1 Press the “ON-OFF” button to

activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on and a message will be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
If the “ON-OFF” button is pressed
and held for 1.5 seconds or more,
the system turns on in constant
speed control mode. (→P. 261)
2 Accelerate or decelerate, with

accelerator pedal operation, to
the desired vehicle speed (at or
above approximately 30 mph
[50 km/h]) and push the lever
down to set the speed.

Driving

Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed
is displayed.
1 Increases the speed
2 Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever
up or down to change the speed,
and release when the desired
speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time
the lever is operated


For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h
(0.6 mph)*2 increments for as long as the lever is held


For Canada, Guam, Saipan, Samoa and Puerto Rico

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5 km/h
(3.1 mph)*2 increments for as long as the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode (→P. 261), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is
held.

*1: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
*2: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

4-5. Using the driving support systems

259

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
Pressing the switch changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

Preceding vehicle mark

1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
set automatically to long mode
when the engine switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
If a vehicle is running ahead of
you, the preceding vehicle mark
will also be displayed.

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown
correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)

Medium

Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)

Short

Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

Driving

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)

260

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Canceling and resuming the speed control
1 Pulling the lever toward you

cancels the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled
when
the
brake
pedal
is
depressed.

2 Pushing the lever up resumes

the cruise control and returns
vehicle speed to the set speed.
However, cruise control does not resume when the vehicle speed is
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
When your vehicle is too close to
a vehicle ahead, and sufficient
automatic deceleration via the
cruise control is not possible, the
display will flash and the buzzer
will sound to alert the driver. An
example of this would be if
another driver cuts in front of you
while you are following a vehicle.
Depress the brake pedal to
ensure an appropriate vehicle-tovehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.
● When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds
your vehicle speed
● When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow
speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● When depressing the accelerator pedal

4-5. Using the driving support systems

261

Selecting constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
does not function correctly due to a dirty radar sensor, etc.
1 With

the cruise control off,
press and hold the “ON-OFF”
button for 1.5 seconds or more.
Immediately after the “ON-OFF”
button is pressed, the radar cruise
control indicator will come on.
Afterwards, it switches to the cruise
control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when
operating the lever with the cruise
control off.

accelerator pedal operation, to
the desired vehicle speed (at or
above approximately 30 mph
[50 km/h]) and push the lever
down to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: →P. 258
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P. 260

Driving

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order
to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any
other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota
dealer.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

263

Driving

■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below
the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Brake system operation sound
If the brakes are applied automatically while the vehicle is in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, a brake system operation sound may be heard
from the engine compartment. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message
is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the
instructions.
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the
brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the
accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (→P. 260) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the
detecting of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment, etc.)

● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high
ground clearance

4-5. Using the driving support systems

265

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
may not function correctly
In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system
may not operate properly.
● When the road curves or when the lanes
are narrow

● When steering wheel operation or your
position in the lane is unstable
4

Driving

● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control∗
Summary of functions
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
1 Indicators
2 Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed
1 Press the “ON-OFF” button to

activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come
on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

2 Accelerate or decelerate the

vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.

∗: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

267

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed
is obtained.
1 Increases the speed
2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

1 Pulling the lever toward you

cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.

2 Pushing the lever up resumes

the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Driving

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

268

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased
by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the
lever down to set the new speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below
the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● 4WD models: The operation cannot be switched for 5 seconds or more after
operating the front-wheel drive control switch.
■ If “Cruise Control Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the
multi-information display
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control
system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

269

WARNING
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
4

Driving

270

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Intuitive parking assist∗
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the
sensors and communicated via the multi-information display
and buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this
system.
■ Types of sensors

1 Front corner sensors
2 Rear corner sensors
3 Rear center sensors
■ Intuitive parking assist switch

Turns the intuitive
assist on/off

parking

When on, the indicator light
comes on to inform the driver
that the system is operational.

∗: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

271

The distance display and buzzer
When the sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
■ Intuitive parking assist display

1 Front corner sensor opera-

tion
2 Rear corner sensor operation
3 Rear center sensor operation

■ Sensor operation and distance to an obstacle

The system operates when the vehicle approaches an obstacle, as
shown by the following table.

When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest zone.

Driving



Front corner sensors
Approximate distance to obstacle

Display and buzzer

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)

Intermittent

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

Fast intermittent

Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm)


Continuously

Rear corner sensors
Approximate distance to obstacle

Display and buzzer

2.8 ft. (85 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

Intermittent

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.3 ft. (40 cm)

Fast intermittent

Less than 1.3 ft. (40 cm)

Continuously

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems


Rear center sensor
Approximate distance to obstacle

Display and buzzer

5.9 ft. (180 cm) to 3.3 ft. (100 cm)

Intermittent

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.5 ft. (75 cm)

Fast intermittent

2.5 ft. (75 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm)

Very fast intermittent

Less than 1.6 ft. (50 cm)

Continuously

■ When multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the

vehicle at the same time
The buzzer will change in the following manner.
● If an obstacle has been detected within 1.5 ft. (45 cm) of the front
or 2.8 ft. (85 cm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous buzzer is
sounding), and a new obstacle is detected at the other end of the
vehicle, the buzzer will sound 7 times then 1 continuous buzzer.
● If an obstacle has been detected within 1.5 ft. (45 cm) of the front
or 2.8 ft. (85 cm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous buzzer is
sounding), and a new obstacle is detected in the same way at the
other end of the vehicle, the buzzer will sound 3 times then 1
continuous buzzer.
■ Detection range of the sensors

1 Approximately 5.9 ft. (180 cm)
2 Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
3 Approximately 2.8 ft. (85 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors may not be able to detect
obstacles that are extremely close
to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object, etc.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

273

■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
● Front corner sensors:
• The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
• The shift lever is in R.
• The shift lever is not in P or R and vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph
(10 km/h).
● Rear corner and rear center sensors:
• The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
• The shift lever is in R.
■ If the display flashes and a message is displayed
→P. 557, 558
■ Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
WARNING
4

Driving

■ When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely
and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving
forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially
the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to
control the vehicle’s speed.
● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
■ Sensor detection information
Pay particular attention to the following instances in where this may occur.
Failing to do so way result in the vehicle being unable to be driven or parked
safety and possibly cause an accident.
● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s
front corner and rear bumpers.
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances
where this may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve
this problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing
ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the
vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is
installed.
• A backlit license plate, license plate holder, etc., are installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types and coloring of clothing.
• People, animals, and moving objects may not be able to be detected.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of
their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be
closer than they are.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

275

WARNING

Driving

● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay
particular attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of
your vehicle
● The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection
distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display.
Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come
within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the
warning beep sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for collision when approached, even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or
air flow noise of air conditioning system.

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE
■ When using intuitive parking assist-sensor
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a
sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
● A beep does not sound when you turn the main switch on.
● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds
when no obstacles are detected.
● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to
strong impact.
● If the bumper collides with something.
● If the display shows continuously without a beep.
● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is
likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

277

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an
image of the view behind the vehicle with fixed guide lines on
the screen while backing up, for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples,
and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the
screen.


Vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio
(Multimedia system types: →P. 322)
Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
OWNER’S MANUAL”.



MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM

Vehicles with Entune Audio (Multimedia system types: →P. 322)

The rear view monitor system will
be deactivated when the shift lever
is in any position other than R.

Driving

The rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in R and the
engine switch is in the “ON” position.

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Using the rear view monitor system
■ Screen description

The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift
lever is shifted to R while the engine switch is in “ON” position.

1 Vehicle width guide lines
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

2 Vehicle center guide lines
This lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
3 Distance guide line
Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the
bumper.

4 Distance guide line
Displays a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (blue) from the edge of the
bumper.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

279

Rear view monitor system precautions
■ Area displayed on screen

The rear view monitor system
displays an image of the view
from the bumper of the rear
area of the vehicle.
The image adjustment procedure for the rear view monitor
system screen is the same as
the procedure for adjusting the
screen. (→P. 333)

■ Rear view monitor system camera

The camera for the rear view
monitor system is located as
shown in the illustration.

Driving

• The area displayed on the
screen may vary according to
vehicle orientation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under
the bumper cannot be displayed.
• The camera uses a special lens.
Corners of bumper
The distance of the image that
appears on the screen differs
from the actual distance.
• Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed
on the monitor.

280

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is
adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this
case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera
lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
■ Differences between the screen and the actual road

The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not
actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left
and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error
between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than
they actually are. In the same
way, there will be a margin of
error between the guide lines
and the actual distance/course
on the road.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

281

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be further from the
vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than
they actually are. In the same
way, there will be a margin of
error between the guide lines
and the actual distance/course
on the road.

Driving

● When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle
sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of
the load, there is a margin of
error between the fixed guide
lines on the screen and the
actual distance/course on the
road.

A margin of error

■ When approaching three-dimensional objects

The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced
objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the vehicle width guide lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a
three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed
of a truck), be careful of the following.

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Vehicle width guide lines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below,
the truck appears to be outside
of the vehicle width guide lines
and the vehicle does not look
as if it hits the truck. However,
the rear body of the truck may
actually cross over the vehicle
width guide lines. In reality if
you back up as guided by the
vehicle width guide lines, the
vehicle may hit the truck.

● Distance guide lines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears
that a truck is parking at point
2 . However, in reality if you
back up to point 1 , you will hit
the truck. On the screen, it
appears that 1 is closest and
3 is farthest away. However,
in reality, the distance to 1
and 3 is the same, and 2 is
farther than 1 and 3 .

4-5. Using the driving support systems

283

Things you should know
■ If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Likely cause

Solution

 The image is difficult to see

If this happens due to these causes,
it does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the
monitor again once conditions have
been improved.)
The procedure for adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor
system is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen.

 The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water Flush the camera with a large quandroplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adher- tity of water and wipe the camera
ing to the camera.
lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
 The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has Have the vehicle inspected by your
received a strong impact.
Toyota dealer.
 The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment
The camera position is out of align- Have the vehicle inspected by your
ment.
Toyota dealer.
• The vehicle is tilted (there is a
heavy load on the vehicle, tire
pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an incline.

If this happens due to these causes,
it does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings.

Driving

• The vehicle is in a dark area
• The temperature around the lens
is either high or low
• The outside temperature is low
• There are water droplets on the
camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud, etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• There are scratches on the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights, sodium lights, mercury
lights, etc.

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
■ When using the rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist
the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to visually check all
around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries.
● Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up.
The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may
differ from the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle
speed.
● The instructions given are only guide lines.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view
monitor system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate
your vehicle before maneuvering into it.
● Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or emergency tires
• When the tailgate is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become
faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may
become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check
all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixed guide lines displayed
on the screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and
pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ
from the actual distances. (→P. 280)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

285

NOTICE

Driving

■ How to use the camera
● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following
cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity
of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coating to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured
on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)∗
Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;
● The Blind Spot Monitor function
Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes
● The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use same sensors.

1 Multi-information display
Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off. (→P. 287)
2 Outside rear view mirror indicators
Blind Spot Monitor function:
When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside
rear view mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn
signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view
mirror indicator will flash.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, both outside rear view mirror indicators will flash.

∗: If equipped

287

4-5. Using the driving support systems

3 Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

only)
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is
detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the left-hand rear pillar.

4 “BSM” indicator
When the BSM function is turned on, the indicator illuminates.

5 “RCTA” indicator
When the RCTA function is turned on, the indicator illuminates.

Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off
The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) function can be enabled/disabled on the multi-information display as following:
1 Press “<” or “>” of meter control switches and select

.
4

2 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “BSM” or

to select the desired setting (on/off).

Changing the BSM indicator brightness
The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) outside rear view mirror indicators
brightness can be changed on the multi-information display as following:
1 Press “<” or “>” of meter control switches and select

2 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “Vehicle

Settings”, and then press

3 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “BSM

Brightness”, and then press
(bright/dim).

to select the desired setting

Driving

“RCTA”, and press

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing the Rear Cross Traffic Alert warning buzzer volume
1 Press “<” or “>” of meter control switches and select

2 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “Vehicle

Settings”, and then press

3 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “RCTA Vol-

ume”, and then press

to select the desired setting.

The buzzer volume changes with each

press.

■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.
■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over noises such as
high audio volume.
■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor system
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed: (→P. 557, 558)
● There is a malfunction with the sensors
● The sensors have become dirty
● The outside temperature is extremely high or low
● The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following three conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

289

 For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25 GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING
■ Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor sensor installed inside the left and right side of the
vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind
Spot Monitor system can function correctly.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding
area on the bumper clean at all times.

Driving

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong
impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If
the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have
the area inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on
the bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Toyota color.

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Blind Spot Monitor function
The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles
that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in
the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of
the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.
The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
1 Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)

from the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the
side of the vehicle is not in the
detection area

2 Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from

the rear bumper
3 Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) for-

ward of the rear bumper

4-5. Using the driving support systems

291

WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the
driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the
Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change
lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore
the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur

Driving

■ The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when
● The BSM function is set to on.
● Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes the vehicle.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
● You overtake a vehicle in adjacent lane.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a
vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types
of vehicles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*
● Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle.

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function correctly
● The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:
• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.
• When ice or mud, etc., is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water,
etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and
the vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the
detection area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip
in the road, etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each
vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far
away from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle
• When towing anything such as trailer, boat, etc.
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and
the vehicle that enters the detection area
• Directly after the BSM function is set to on
• When towing a trailer
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail,
wall, etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following
vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from
your vehicle enters the detection area
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle

4-5. Using the driving support systems

293

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse.
It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of
the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators
and sounding a buzzer.

1 Approaching vehicles

2 Detection areas

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even
when using Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver’s own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are
no pedestrians, other vehicles, etc., before backing up. Failure to do so
could cause death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore
the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

Driving

WARNING

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert
for faster vehicles from farther away.
Example:
1 Approximate

Approaching vehicle

Speed

Fast

18 mph (28 km/h)

65 ft. (20 m)

Slow

5 mph (8 km/h)

18 ft. (5.5 m)

alert distance

■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when
● The RCTA function is set to on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and
18 mph (28 km/h).

4-5. Using the driving support systems

295

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not
detect a vehicle
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following
types of vehicles and/or objects.
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle*

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
because of obstacles

Driving

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not
function correctly
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the
following conditions.
● When ice or mud, etc., is attached to the rear bumper
● During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.
● When multiple vehicles approach continuously
● Shallow angle parking
● When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
● When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.
● Directly after the RCTA function is set to on
● Directly after the engine is started with the RCTA function is on
● When towing a trailer

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Four-wheel drive system∗
Summary of functions
Use the front-wheel drive control switch to select the following transfer
modes:

1 “2WD” (high speed position, two-wheel drive)
Use this for normal driving on dry hard-surfaced roads. This position
gives greater economy, quietest ride and least wear.

2 “4H” (high speed position, four-wheel drive)
Use this for driving only on tracks that permit the tires slide, like off-road,
icy or snow-covered roads. This position provides greater traction than
two-wheel drive.
The “4HI” indicator will come on.

3 “4L” (low speed position, four-wheel drive)
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use “4L” for climbing or
descending steep hills, off-road driving, and hard pulling in sand, mud or
deep snow.
The “4LO” indicator will come on.

∗: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

297

Shifting between “2WD” and “4H”
■ Shifting from “2WD” to “4H”
1 Reduce vehicle speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h).
2 Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “4H”.

The “4HI” indicator will come on.
■ Shifting from “4H” to “2WD”
1 Reduce vehicle speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h).
2 Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “2WD”.

The “4HI” indicator will go off.

Shifting between “4H” and “4L”
■ Shifting from “4H” to “4L”
1 Stop the vehicle completely and continue to depress the brake

pedal.

2 Shift the shift lever to N.

The “4LO” indicator will come on.
■ Shifting from “4L” to “4H”
1 Stop the vehicle completely and continue to depress the brake

pedal.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.
3 Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “4H”.

The “4LO” indicator will go off.

Driving

3 Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “4L”.

298

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ When the front-wheel drive control switch is shifted to “4L”
VSC is automatically turned off.
■ If the “4HI” indicator flashes
The transfer mode may not successfully change. Drive straight ahead while
accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
■ If the “4LO” indicator continues to flash
The transfer mode may not successfully change. Operate the front-wheel
drive control switch again.
■ If the “4LO” indicator continues to flash and a buzzer sounds
The shift lever is not in N and/or the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle completely, shift the shift lever to N and make sure that the indicator stops flashing.
■ If the “4HI” or “4LO” indicator flashes rapidly
There may be a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Four-wheel drive usage frequency
You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 10 miles (16 km) each month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.
WARNING
■ Shifting the front-wheel drive control switch from “2WD” to “4H” while
driving
Never operate the front-wheel drive control switch if the wheels are slipping.
Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.
■ When the vehicle is parked
If the shift lever is moved before the “4LO” indicator turns on/off, the transfer
mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to
move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and
the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in
P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the
shifting of the transfer mode before placing transmission in P.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

299

AUTO LSD system
The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction control system to control engine performance and braking when
one of the drive wheels begins to spin.
The system should be used only when one of the drive wheels
spinning occurs in a ditch or rough surface.
System operation
The system can be used on 2WD models and in 2WD mode on 4WD
models. The system is activated when driving at a speed under
62 mph (100 km/h). The AUTO LSD system will be activated with the
following two procedures.
4

Press the

briefly to turn on

The “AUTO LSD” indicator will
come on.
To turn off the system, press
again.
Stop the vehicle completely, and
press

for more than 3 sec-

onds.
The “AUTO LSD” and VSC off
indicators will come on.
To turn off the system, press
again.

Driving

the system.

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ If the brake system overheats
The system will cease operation and a buzzer will alert the driver. At this time,
the “TRAC OFF” indicator will come on. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
(There is no problem with continuing normal driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time.
WARNING
■ To avoid an accident
Failure to do so, a much greater steering effort and more careful cornering
control will be required.
● Do not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other than when one of
the drive wheels spinning occurs in a ditch or rough surface.
● Do not drive with the AUTO LSD system continuously turned on.
NOTICE
■ Activating while driving
Do not activate the AUTO LSD system if the wheel is slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning before activating.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

301

Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly,
or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

◆ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal
is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or
turning on slippery road surfaces

◆ Trailer Sway Control
Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake
pressure for individual wheels and reducing driving torque when
trailer sway is detected

◆ TRAC (Traction Control) for 2WD models and 2WD mode on
4WD models
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from
spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

◆ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill

Driving

◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

302

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway
Control systems are operating.

Disabling the TRAC systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing

to turn

the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order
to free it.
■ Turning off TRAC system


2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models

To turn the TRAC system off,
press

The “AUTO LSD” indicator light
will come on.
Press

again to turn the

system back on.

4-5. Using the driving support systems


303

4H mode on 4WD models

To turn the TRAC system off,
press

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
will come on.
Press

again to turn the

system back on.


4L mode on 4WD models

To turn the TRAC system off,
press and hold

for more

than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

Press

again to turn the

system back on.

Driving

The VSC off and “TRAC OFF”
indicator light will come on.

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Turning off TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems
 2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models
To turn the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems off, stop the vehicle completely, and then press and hold

for more than 3 seconds

while the AUTO LSD system is activated. (→P. 299)
 4H mode on 4WD models

To turn the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems off, press and
hold

for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC off and “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on.
Press

again to turn the system back on.

■ When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC off
switch
On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking will also be disabled. The PCS warning light will come on and
the message will be shown on the multi-information display. (→P. 563)
■ When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if VSC off switch
has not been pressed.
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will
operate:
● The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/
backward on an upward incline)
● The vehicle is stopped
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed
● The parking brake is not engaged
■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:
The shift lever is shifted to P or N
● The accelerator pedal is depressed
● The parking brake is engaged
● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the brake pedal is released

4-5. Using the driving support systems

305

Driving

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC,
Trailer Sway Control and hill-start assist control systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal
is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and VSC systems
After turning the TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:
● When the engine switch is turned off
● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle
speed increases
If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will
not occur when vehicle speed increases.
■ If the brake system overheats
TRAC will cease operation, and the slip indicator will change from flashing to
being on continuously to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
(There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)
■ Shifting to “4L”
VSC and Trailer Sway Control are automatically turned off.

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as
excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the
following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be
lost.
■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may
not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the
vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may
lead to an accident.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

307

WARNING

Driving

■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control are activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving
force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems off unless
necessary.
Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if VSC is
turned off or experiences a malfunction.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems will not function
correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
■ Trailer Sway Control precaution
The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle,
trailer, road surface, and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control system may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for information on how to tow your trailer properly.
■ If trailer sway occurs
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
● Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize. (→P. 191)

308

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Trailer brake controller∗
Summary of functions
The trailer brakes can be controlled by the Trailer brake controller via
the 7-pin connector. By selecting the type of brakes that are being
used on the trailer (electric or electric-over-hydraulic) and setting the
gain for the controller, the manual TRAILER BRAKE OUTPUT slider
is used to slow just the trailer. The vehicle brake pedal will also slow
down as well as stop the trailer when applied, also via the same connector. Gain values, manual brake outputs, trailer brake types, and
the trailer connection status are displayed in the multi-information display.

1 Trailer connection indicator

When the trailer has been connected, the indicator comes on
green.
2 GAIN (+/-) selection button

Pressing the GAIN (+/-) buttons will adjust the amount of power
that can be outputted to the trailer brakes. The gain can be
adjusted from 0 (no trailer braking) to 10 (maximum output) in 0.5
increments. Each press of the button will increase or decrease
the gain setting by one step. The gain value will appear in the
multi-information display.

∗: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

309

3 Trailer brake type
Trailer brake type can be selected by using the multi-information. The
combination meter will show which trailer brake type is selected in the
multi-information display.

4 Manual TRAILER BRAKE OUTPUT slider
Adjusting this slider position will engage the trailer’s brakes only. If the
manual TRAILER BRAKE OUTPUT slider is used while the vehicle
brake is applied, the greater of the two outputs will be sent to the trailer
brakes.

Changing settings of the trailer brake type
The trailer brake type can be selected on the multi-information display
as following:
1 Press “<” or “>” of meter control switches and select

2 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “Vehicle Set-

tings”, and press

Type”, and press
to select the correct type of trailer brakes that
are equipped on the trailer.
Changing trailer brake type will cause the current gain setting to reset
to zero. Make sure to set the gain as described in the following section.
Setting the Gain
Gain setting on trailer brake controller should be set for a specific towing condition. Gain setting should be adjusted each time the vehicle
load, trailer load, road conditions, or weather changes. Setting the
gain value to 0 will disable the trailer brake controller output.
1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition and

functioning normally. See trailer dealer if necessary.
2 Hook up the trailer and make proper electrical connections.
3 Select the correct type of trailer brakes that are equipped on the

trailer by using the multi-information display.
4 Drive vehicle with trailer attached on a level road surface similar to

towing condition and in traffic-free environment. Driving speed
should be approximately 20 - 25 mph [35 - 40 km/h].

Driving

3 Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “TBC Trailer

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

5 Using the GAIN (+/-) selection

buttons, set a starting gain of
5.0.

6 While driving 20 - 25 mph [35 - 40 km/h], fully apply the manual

TRAILER BRAKE OUTPUT slider.
7 Adjust the gain setting, using the GAIN (+/-) selection buttons, to

either increase or decrease to just below the point of trailer wheel
lock-up.
8 For confirmation, repeat steps 6 and 7 until desired gain setting

is reached (just below point of trailer wheel lock-up).
■ When using the trailer brake control system
Please turn off the intuitive parking assist while towing a trailer. If left on,
sonar sensors will detect the trailer being towed.
■ When setting the gain
Wheel lock-up occurs when the trailer wheel squeals or tire smoke occurs.
Trailer wheels may not lock-up while driving heavily loaded trailer. During this
case, adjust the Trailer gain to the highest allowable setting for the towing
condition.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The gain setting data will be reset.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

311

WARNING
■ Trailer brake type setting
It is the responsibility of the driver to make sure the trailer brakes are functioning normally and adjusted appropriately. Failure to check and maintain
trailer brakes may result in loss of vehicle control, crash, or serious injury.
Trailer brake control system will work with most electric and electric-overhydraulic trailer braking systems up to 3 axles (24A output to trailer brakes).
Please be sure to test compatibility with the system at low speeds and in a
safe area. If a warning message appears in the multi-information display
(→P. 563), have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Some electric-over-hydraulic trailer brakes will take some minimum output
to activate. Trailer brake control system will not work with trailer hydraulic
surge brakes.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
When stopping with ABS activated, output to the trailer might be reduced in
order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheels to lock. The trailer is not
equipped with ABS. Drive safely on slippery road surfaces.

Driving

312

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before
driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.
Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away
the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the
tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

4-6. Driving tips

313

When parking the vehicle
● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking
brake, make sure to block the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.
● If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm
that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P*.

*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any
other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be
shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Refueling (Flex-fuel vehicles)

Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
1 Side chain

(0.2 in. [5 mm] in diameter)
2 Cross chain

(0.25 in. [6.3 mm] in diameter)

Driving

Observe the following precautions when switching fuels, in order to
maintain starting and driving performance.
● Do not change fuels when the fuel level is 1/4 or less.
● Always add at least 2.6 gal. (10 L) of fuel.
● After filling up with fuel, warm up the engine or drive the vehicle for
at least 5 minutes or 7 miles (11 km).
● Do not accelerate rapidly immediately after refueling.

314

4-6. Driving tips

Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 ⎯ 1/2 mile (0.5 ⎯ 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
● 4WD models: Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns
or treadwear.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

4-6. Driving tips

315

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.

Driving

316

4-6. Driving tips

Off-road precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has
higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the
height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in
a wide variety of off-road applications.
Off-road vehicle features
● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this
type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause the vehicle to rollover.

4-6. Driving tips

317

WARNING

Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles.
● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.
● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering
private property.
● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.

Driving

■ Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should always fasten their seat belts.
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
● Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicle’s center of
gravity.
● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher
center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss
of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle)
can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

318

4-6. Driving tips

■ Additional information for off-road driving
 For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road,
consult the following organizations.
● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
● State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● Recreational Vehicle Clubs
● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
WARNING
■ Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving
in dangerous places.
● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump
could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.
● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that
there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc., adhering or trapped
on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the
vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody,
a breakdown or fire could occur.
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss
of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

4-6. Driving tips

319

NOTICE

Driving

■ To prevent the water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and
transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
■ When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check
the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive
slowly and avoid deep water.
■ Inspection after off-road driving
● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

320

Multimedia

5
5-1. Basic Operations
Multimedia system types.....322
Entune Audio ......................324
Steering wheel audio
switches .......................... 327
USB Port/AUX Port ........... 328
5-2. Setup
Setup menu....................... 329
General settings................ 330
Audio settings ................... 332
Display settings................. 333
Voice settings.................... 334
5-3. Using the audio system
Basic audio operations...... 335
Selecting the audio
source ............................. 336
List screen operation......... 337
Sound settings .................. 339
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation................. 340
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation .......... 342

321

Multimedia

5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod .......... 347
Listening to a USB
memory device................ 351
Using the AUX port ........... 355
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Preparations to use
wireless
communication................ 356
Registering a Bluetooth®
audio player
for the first time ............... 361
Registering a Bluetooth®
phone for the first time ... 362
Registering a Bluetooth®
device.............................. 363
Connecting a Bluetooth®
device.............................. 365
Displaying a Bluetooth®
device details .................. 367
Detailed Bluetooth®
system settings ............... 368
5-8. Bluetooth® audio
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio ............................... 369

5
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Using a Bluetooth®
phone .............................. 370
Making a call ..................... 372
Receiving a call................. 375
Speaking on the phone ..... 376
Bluetooth® phone
message function............ 379
Using the steering wheel
switches .......................... 383
Bluetooth® phone
settings ........................... 384
Contact/Call History
Settings ........................... 386
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............ 395
5-10. Using the voice command
system
Voice command system.... 399
5-11. Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® ......................... 403
5-12. Antenna
Antenna............................. 408

322

5-1. Basic Operations

Multimedia system types


Entune Audio
→P. 324



Entune Audio Plus
Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM

5-1. Basic Operations


323

Entune Premium Audio
Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM

Multimedia

324

5-1. Basic Operations

Entune Audio
Operations such as listening to audio, using the hands-free
phone, confirming vehicle information and changing multimedia
system settings are started by using the following buttons.
Multimedia system operation buttons

button
Press this button to access the Bluetooth® hands-free system.
(→P. 370)

2 “SETUP” button

Press this button to customize the function settings. (→P. 329)
3 “AUDIO” button

Display the “Select Audio Source” screen or audio control
screen. (→P. 336)
4 “TRUCK” button

Press this button to access the fuel consumption information.
(→P. 107)

5-1. Basic Operations

325

Operating the touch screen
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the Audio
system, hands-free system, etc.
■ Drag*

Touch the screen with your finger and move the screen to the
desired position.
● Scrolling the lists
● Using scroll bar in lists
■ Flick*

Touch the screen with your finger and then quickly move the
screen.
● Scrolling the main screen page
● Returning to the menu screen from the sub-menu screen (screen
one level below)

*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
5

Multimedia

■ When using the touch screen
● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be
operating slightly slower than normal.
● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display
Settings” screen (→P. 333) or remove your sunglasses.
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the multimedia system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the multimedia
system is operating.

326

5-1. Basic Operations

WARNING
■ Laser product
THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS I LASER PRODUCT. USE OF CONTROLS
OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT
REPAIR BY YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL.

NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the touch screen
● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your
finger.
● Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical
cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the multimedia system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
■ To avoid damaging the multimedia system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the multimedia system.

5-1. Basic Operations

327

Steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on
the steering wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of multimedia system or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the multimedia system or navigation system.
Operating the multimedia system using the steering wheel
switches
1 Radio mode:

• Press: Selects a radio station
• Press and hold: Seeks up/
down

2 Volume switch

• Increases/decreases volume
• Press and hold: Continuously increases/decreases volume
3 “MODE/HOLD” switch

• Changes audio source
• Press and hold this switch to mute or pause the current operation
To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold.
WARNING
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

Multimedia

CD, MP3/WMA disc, Bluetooth®, iPod or USB mode:
• Press: Selects a track/file/
song
• Press and hold: Fast scroll thru the track/file/song list

328

5-1. Basic Operations

USB Port/AUX Port
Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player
to the USB/AUX port as indicated below. Select “iPod”, “USB” or
“AUX” on the “Select Audio Source” screen and the device can
be operated via multimedia system.
Connecting using the USB/AUX port
■ iPod

Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if
it is not turned on.

■ USB memory

Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.
Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.
■ Portable audio player

Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.
Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.

5-2. Setup

329

Setup menu
You can adjust the multimedia system to your desired settings.
Display “Setup” screen
Press the “SETUP” button to display the “Setup” screen.
1 Select to adjust the settings for

operation sounds, screen animation, etc. (→P. 330)
2 Select to set the voice settings.

(→P. 334)
3 Select to adjust the settings for

contrast and brightness of the
screen. (→P. 333)
4 Select to adjust the settings for registering, removing, connecting

and disconnecting Bluetooth® devices. (→P. 360, 365)
5 Select to adjust the settings for phone sound, contact, etc.

(→P. 384)
7 Select to turn the screen off.
8 Select to set the vehicle customization. (→P. 624)

Multimedia

6 Select to set radio and external media settings. (→P. 332)

330

5-2. Setup

General settings
Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds,
screen animation, etc.
Screen for general settings
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup”

screen.
1 Select to adjust the clock.

(→P. 331)
2 “English”,

“Français”
or
“Español” can be selected.

3 On/off can be selected to

sound beeps.
4 Select to change the screen

color.
5 Select to change the key-

board layout.
6 The animation effect for the

screen can be set to on/off.
7 Select to delete personal

data (→P. 331)
8 Select to update program versions. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.
9 Select to display the software information. Notices related to third

party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes
instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.)
■ To return to the default settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

5-2. Setup

331

Setting the clock
1 Select “Clock” on the “General Settings” screen.
2 Adjust the time, then select “OK”.

Delete personal data
1 Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
2 Select “Delete”.

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.
3 A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.

• Audio settings
• Phone settings

Multimedia

The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default
settings.

332

5-2. Setup

Audio settings
Settings are available for adjusting the radio operation, cover
art, etc.
Screen for audio settings
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.

1 Select the number of radio

preset stations.
2 Select to display the cover

art.
3 Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low” or

“Off”.

■ About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed.

5-2. Setup

333

Display settings
Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness
of the screen.
Screen for display settings
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Select “Display” on the “Setup” screen.

1 Adjust general screen con-

trast/brightness
2 Adjust camera screen con-

trast/brightness
3 Changes to day mode.

Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness
2 Adjust the display as desired by selecting “+” or “-”.

Day mode
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day
Mode”.
The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until
“Day Mode” is selected again.

Multimedia

1 Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display Settings” screen.

334

5-2. Setup

Voice settings
This screen is used for guidance for voice command systems
setting.
1 Adjust the voice guidance vol-

ume setting.
2 Set

the voice recognition
prompts “High”, “Low” or “Off”.

3 Set the train voice recognition.
4 Set the voice prompt interrupt

on/off.
5 Voice recognition tutorial

5-3. Using the audio system

335

Basic audio operations
Basic audio operations and functions common to each mode are
explained in this section.
Operating the multimedia system

the knob can be used to select items in the list display.
2 Press the “∧” or “∨” button to seek up or down for a radio station,

or to access a desired track or file.
3 Press to pause or resume playing music.
4 Press this knob to turn the multimedia system on and off, and

turn it to adjust the volume.
5 Press this button to eject a disc
6 Insert a disc into the disc slot
7 “Select Audio Source” screen appears (→P. 336)
8 Setting the Sound (→P. 339)
9 Pause or resume playing music
10 Select to enable repeat play
11 Select to enable random playback

Multimedia

1 Turn this knob to select radio station bands, tracks and files. Also

336

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting the audio source
Switching between audio sources such as radio and CD are
explained in this section.
Selecting the audio source
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
2 Select “Source” on the audio control screen or press the “AUDIO”

button again.
3 Select

the

desired

audio

source.

■ Reordering the audio source
1 Select “Reorder”.
2 Select the desired audio source then
3 Select “OK”.

to reorder.

5-3. Using the audio system

337

List screen operation
When a list style screen is displayed, use the appropriate buttons to scroll through the list.
How to scroll
: Select to scroll to the next
or previous page.
: If
appears to the right of
titles, the complete titles are
too long for the display. Select
this button to scroll the title.
Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob
to move the cursor box to select a
desired item from the list, and
press the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob
to play it. The track that is being
played is highlighted.

Multimedia

To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

338

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs
■ Selecting a track/file/song

Press the “∧” or “∨” button on “SEEK/TRACK” or turn the
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob to select the desired track/file/song number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the “∧” or “∨” button on
“SEEK/TRACK”.
■ Selecting a track/file/song from the track/file/song list
1 Select “Browse” or cover art.
2 Select the desired track/file/

song.

When an MP3/WMA/AAC disc or USB memory device is being used,
the folder can be selected. When a Bluetooth® device or iPod is being
used, the album can be selected.
According to the audio device, the following is displayed.
Audio source

List name

Audio CD

Track

MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB

Folder, File

Bluetooth®

Album, Track

iPod

Album, Song

5-3. Using the audio system

339

Sound settings
On the “Sound Settings” screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/
Bass), volume balance can be adjusted.
Tone and balance
Select “Sound” on the audio control screen to adjust the sound settings.
1 2 3 Select “-” or “+” to adjust

the treble, mid or bass to
a level between -5 and 5.
4 5 Select “Front” or “Rear” to

adjust the front/rear audio
balance.
6 7 Select “L” or “R” to adjust the

left/right audio balance.
5

Multimedia

■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode separately.

340

5-4. Using the radio

Radio operation
Select “AM” or “FM” on the “Select Audio Source” screen to
begin listening to the radio.
Audio control screen
1 “Select Audio Source” screen

appears
2 Preset stations
3 Select to display RBDS text

messages*
4 Scanning for receivable station
5 Select to display a list of receiv-

able stations
6 Setting the sound (→P. 339)
*: FM only

Selecting a station
Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.
■ Seek tuning

Press the “∧” or “∨” button on “SEEK/TRACK”.
The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest
frequency and will stop when a station is found.
■ Manual tuning

Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob.
■ Preset stations

Select the desired preset station.

5-4. Using the radio

341

Setting station presets
1 Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob or

pressing the “∧” or “∨” button on “SEEK/TRACK”.
2 Select “(add new)”

To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset
station.
3 Select “Yes”.
4 Select “OK” after setting the new preset station.

■ Refreshing the station list

Select “Refresh” on the “Station List” screen.
To cancel the refresh, select “Cancel Refresh”.
■ Reception sensitivity
Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
5

Multimedia

342

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

CD player operation
Insert disc or select “CD” on the “Select Audio Source” screen
to begin listening to a CD.
Audio control screen
1 “Select Audio Source” screen

appears
2 Audio CD:

Displaying the track list
(→P. 338)
MP3/WMA/AAC:
Displaying the folder list
(→P. 338)
3 Random playback
4 Repeat play
5 Pause

Select

to resume play

6 Setting the sound (→P. 339)
■ Displaying the title and artist name
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.
■ Error messages
If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your
Toyota dealer.
Message

Cause

Correction procedures

“Check DISC”

• The disc is dirty or • Clean the disc.
damaged.
• Insert the disc cor• The disc is inserted
rectly.
upside down.
• Confirm the disc is
• The disc is not playplayable with the
able with the player.
player.

“Disc Error”

There is a malfunction
Eject the disc.
within the system.

“No music files found.”

No playable data is
Eject the disc.
included on the disc.

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

343

■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

Multimedia

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside
of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized
Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression
technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

344

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)
● AAC file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and
CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is
not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the
disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed
above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may
not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are
those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the multimedia system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the
first session can be played.

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

345

Multimedia

● ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3, WMA and AAC playback
When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the
disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or
AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write any files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC
files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format
data cannot be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than
MP3, WMA and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played
as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,
WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it
may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback
may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• This system can playback AAC files encorded by iTunes.

346

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

NOTICE
■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm).
● Low-quality or deformed discs.
● Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.
● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that
have had the label peeled off.
■ Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
● Do not apply oil to the player.
● Store discs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

5-6. Using an external device

347

Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
Select “iPod” on the “Select Audio Source” screen.
When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the
system can only output the sound by selecting the browse
screen.
Connecting an iPod
→P. 328
Audio control screen
1 “Select Audio Source” screen

appears
2 Displays cover art
3 Selecting the play mode
5 Repeat play
6 Pause

Select

to resume playback

7 Setting the sound (→P. 339)

Selecting a play mode
1 Select “Browse” on the “iPod” screen.
2 Select the desired play mode by selecting the “Playlists”, “Artists”,

“Albums”, “Songs”, “Podcasts”, “Audio books”, “Genres”, “Composers” or “Video”. Then select a song to begin using the selected play
mode.

Multimedia

4 Shuffle play

348

5-6. Using an external device

■ About iPod

● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone respectively,
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
■ iPod cover art
● Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.
● This function can be changed to on/off. (→P. 332)
● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated
while the cover art display is in process.
● Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s multimedia system instead.
● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If
so, charge the iPod before use.
● Compatible models (→P. 350)

5-6. Using an external device

349

■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on
how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
■ Error messages
Message

Cause/Correction procedures

“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s Man- This indicates a problem in the iPod or its conual for instructions on how nection.
to connect the iPod.”
“There are no songs available for playback. Please This indicates that there is no music data in
add compatible files to the iPod.
your iPod.”
This indicates that the software version is not
“Please check the iPod compatible.
firmware version.”
Please check the compatible models.
(→P. 350)
This indicates that the display multimedia sys“iPod authorization unsuctem failed to authorize the iPod.
cessful.”
Please check your iPod.

Multimedia

350

5-6. Using an external device

■ Compatible models
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone®
devices can be used with this system.
● Made for
• iPod touch (5th generation)
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (7th generation)
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPhone 6 Plus
• iPhone 6
• iPhone 5s
• iPhone 5c
• iPhone 5
• iPhone 4S
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals
● Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

5-6. Using an external device

351

Listening to a USB memory device
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music
from the vehicle speakers.
Select “USB” on the “Select Audio Source” screen.
Connecting a USB memory device
→P. 328
Audio control screen
1 “Select Audio Source” screen

appears
2 Displays cover art
3 Displaying the folder list

(→P. 338)
4 Random playback
5

5 Repeat play

Select

Multimedia

6 Pause

to resume playback

7 Setting the sound (→P. 339)
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the
device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device
and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.
■ Error messages for USB memory
Message

Cause/Correction procedures

“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s Man- This indicates a problem with the USB memual for instruction on how to ory device or its connection.
connect the USB device.”
“There are no files available
for playback. Please add This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files
compatible files to your USB are included on the USB memory device.
device.”

352

5-6. Using an external device

■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory device that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback.
● Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
• USB communication format: USB2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than
those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder
names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
● MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYER3, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)

5-6. Using an external device

353

Multimedia

● AAC file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are
those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3, WMA and AAC playback
• When a device containing MP3, WMA and AAC files is connected, all
files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA and AAC file is played. To make the file check
finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other
than MP3, WMA and AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is
changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and
reconnected (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than
MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,
WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

354

5-6. Using an external device

WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect a USB memory device or operate the device controls.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
● Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature
inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB
memory device.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
device while it is connected.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

5-6. Using an external device

355

Using the AUX port
To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, then select
“AUX” on the “Select Audio Source” screen.
Connecting a portable audio player
→P. 328
■ Operating portable audio players connected to the multimedia system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio player itself.
■ When using a portable audio player connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio player.
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect a portable audio player or operate the device controls.

Multimedia

356

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

Preparations to use wireless communication
The following can be performed using Bluetooth® wireless communication:
■ A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via

multimedia system
■ Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone

In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a
Bluetooth® device by performing the following procedures.
■ About Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Panasonic Corporation is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.

■ Certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: ACJ932YEAP01A727
NOTE:
<§15.19(a)(3)> This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
<§15.21> Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
CAUTION:
<§2.1091> Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This
transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjuction with any other
antenna or transmitter.

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

357

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Multimedia

NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique
subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
NOTE:
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number, or model
number if Category II) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate
with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and
required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna
types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain
indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certification ou son numéro de modèle s’il fait partie du matériel de catégorie II) a
été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types
d’antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et
l’impédance requise pour chaque type d’antenne. Les types d’antenne non
inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal
indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l’exploitation de l’émetteur.

358

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

Access to http://www.ptc.panasonic.eu/,enter the below Model No. into the
keyword search box, you can download the latest “DECLARATION of CONFORMITY” (DoC).
Model No. YEAP01D104

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

359

Device registration/connection flow
1. Register the Bluetooth® device to be used with multimedia
system (→P. 361, 362, 363)

2. Connect the Bluetooth® device to be used
(→P. 365)
To be used for audio

To be used for hands-free
phone

3. Start Bluetooth® connection (→P. 365)

4. Check connection status
(→P. 371)

5. Use Bluetooth® audio
(→P. 369)

5. Use Bluetooth® phone
(→P. 370)

Multimedia

4. Check connection status
(→P. 369)

360

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

Registering and connecting from the “Bluetooth Setup” screen
To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button and
select “Bluetooth” on the “Setup” screen.
1 Select to connect the device to

be used with multimedia system. (→P. 365)
2 Select to register a Bluetooth®

device to be used with multimedia system. (→P. 363)
3 Select

to
set
Bluetooth® system
(→P. 368)

detailed
settings.

4 Select to delete registered devices. (→P. 364)

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

361

Registering a Bluetooth® audio player for
the first time
To use the Bluetooth® Audio, it is necessary to register an audio
player with the system.
Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the
Bluetooth® Audio.
This operation cannot be performed while driving.
For details about registering a Bluetooth® device (→P. 363)
1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your audio player on.

This function is not available when the Bluetooth® connection setting of
your audio player is set to off.
2 Press the “AUDIO” button.
3 Select “

Audio” on the “Select Audio Source” screen.

4 Follow the steps in “How to registering a Bluetooth® device” from
step 2 . (→P. 363)

Multimedia

362

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first
time
To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth® phone with the system.
Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the
hands-free system.
For details about registering a Bluetooth® device (→P. 363)
1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone on.
2 Press the

button.

3 Select “YES” to register a phone.
4 Follow the steps in “How to registering a Bluetooth® device” from
step 3 . (→P. 363)

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

363

Registering a Bluetooth® device
Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players
(AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5
Bluetooth® devices.
How to register a Bluetooth® device
1 Display the “Bluetooth Setup” screen. (→P. 360)
2 Select “Add”.
3 When this screen is displayed,

search for the device name displayed on this screen on the
screen of your Bluetooth®
device.

4 Register the Bluetooth® device using your Bluetooth® device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® device being
connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the
Bluetooth® device’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® device
according to the confirmation message.
5 Check that this screen is dis-

played when
complete.

registration

Multimedia

For details about operating the
Bluetooth® device, see the manual
that comes with it.
To cancel the registration, select
“Cancel”.

364

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

6 Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connect-

ing...” to “Connected”.
If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try
again.

Registration can be performed from screens other than the “Bluetooth
Setup” screen.
■ When registering from the “Bluetooth Audio” screen
1 Display the “Bluetooth Audio” screen. (→P. 369)
2 Select “Select Device”.
3 Follow the steps in “How to registering a Bluetooth® device” from
step 2 . (→P. 363)

Deleting a Bluetooth® device
1 Display the “Bluetooth Setup” screen. (→P. 360)
2 Select “Remove”.
3 Select the desired device.
4 A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to delete the

device.
5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is

complete.

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

365

Connecting a Bluetooth® device
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones (HFP) and audio players
(AVP)) can be registered.
If more than 1 Bluetooth® device has been registered, select
which device to connect to.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Select “Bluetooth” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select the device to be con-

nected.
Supported profile icons will be displayed.
1 Phone

2 Audio player

Auto connection
To turn auto connection mode on, set “Bluetooth Power” to on.
(→P. 368)
When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. Always
set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where a
connection can be established.
When the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.
Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the
phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed.

Multimedia

Supported profile icons for currently connected devices will illuminate.
Dimmed icons can be selected to connect to the function directly.

366

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

Manual connection
When auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth Power” is turned off,
you must connect the Bluetooth® device manually.
Follow the steps in “Connecting a Bluetooth® device” from step 1 .
(→P. 365)
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player


Registering an additional device
1 Select “Select Device” on the “Bluetooth Audio” screen.
2 For more information: →P. 363



Selecting a registered device
1 Select “Select Device” on the “Bluetooth Audio” screen.
2 For more information: →P. 365

■ Reconnecting a Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the engine
switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system will automatically attempt to
reconnect.
If the system is attempting to connect to a Bluetooth® phone and the Bluetooth® phone is turned off and then back on, the system will attempt to reconnect.

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

367

Displaying a Bluetooth® device details
You can confirm and change the registered device details.
Bluetooth® device registration status
1 Display the “Bluetooth Setup” screen. (→P. 360)
2 Select the device.
3 Select “Device Info”.
4 Following screen is displayed:

1 Device name
2 Change connection method

(→P. 367)
3 Bluetooth® address
4 Display your telephone num-

ber

5 Compatibility profile of the

device
6 Restore default settings

Changing connection method
1 Select “Connect Audio Player from”.
2 Select “Vehicle” or “Device”.

“Vehicle”: Connect the multimedia system to the portable audio player.
“Device”: Connect the portable audio player to the multimedia system.

Multimedia

The number may not be displayed depending on the model
of phone.

368

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®

Detailed Bluetooth® system settings
You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth® settings.
How to check and change detailed Bluetooth® settings
1 Display the “Bluetooth Setup” screen. (→P. 360)
2 Select “System Settings”.
3 The following screen is displayed:

1 Bluetooth® power on/off
You can change Bluetooth®
function on/off

2 Bluetooth® name
3 Change PIN-code (→P. 368)
4 Bluetooth® address
5 Display phone status
You can set the system to show
the status confirmation display
when connecting a telephone

6 Display audio player status
You can set the system to show
the status confirmation display
when connecting an audio
player

7 Compatibility profile of the system
8 Restore default settings

Editing the Bluetooth® PIN
You can change the PIN-code that is used to register your Bluetooth®
devices in the system.
1 Select “Bluetooth PIN”.
2 Input a PIN-code, and select “OK”.

5-8. Bluetooth® audio

369

Listening to Bluetooth® audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables the user to enjoy music
played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
Select “

Audio” on the “Select Audio Source” screen.

When a Bluetooth® device cannot be connected, check the connection status on the “Bluetooth Audio” screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect the device. (→P. 360, 365)
Audio control screen
Some titles and controls may not be displayed depending on the type
of portable audio player used.
1 Connection status
2 Battery charge
3 “Select Audio Source” screen

appears
Multimedia

4 Selecting a Bluetooth® device
5 Select to display the play mode

selection screen
26 Random playback
7 Repeat play
8 Pause

Select

to resume play

9 Setting the sound (→P. 339)
Indicators
Connection status
Battery charge

Conditions
Good

Not connected

Full

Empty

370

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Using a Bluetooth® phone
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your
cellular phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data
system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to
the hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery
charge, call area and signal strength. (→P. 371)
If a Bluetooth® device cannot be connected, check the connection
status on the phone screen. If the device is not connected, either
register or reconnect it. (→P. 360, 365)
Phone screen
To display the screen shown below, press the
ing wheel or press the
button.

switch on the steer-

Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is displayed by selecting the 4 tabs.
1 Device name
2 Bluetooth® connection status

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

371

■ Microphone

The vehicle’s built in microphone is located near the ceiling, in the
front of the vehicle, and is used when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth®
phone in the system. (→P. 363)
Status display
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge
on any screen.
1 Connection status
2 Signal strength
3 Battery charge

Conditions
Good

Poor

Not connected

Connection status

Battery charge

Full

Call area
Signal strength

Empty
“Rm”: Roaming area

Excellent

Poor

Multimedia

Indicators

372

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Making a call
Once a Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call
using the following procedure:
Dialing
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter a phone number.

To delete the input phone number, select
.
For the first digit, you can enter “+” by selecting “∗” for a while.
3 Press the

switch on the steering wheel or select

Dialing from the contacts list
You can dial a number from the contact data imported from your cellular phone. The system has one contact for each registered phone. Up
to 2500 contacts may be stored in each contact. (→P. 372)
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select “Contacts” tab.
3 Choose the desired contact to call from the list.
4 Choose the number and then press the

wheel or select

switch on the steering

When the contact is empty
You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth® phone to the system.
Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If the cellular
phone does not support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile)
service, you cannot transfer contacts.
■ For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones


When “Automatic Transfer” is set to on (→P. 386)
1 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.
Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth® phone.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone


373

When “Automatic Transfer” is set to off
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the desired item.

1 Select to transfer new con-

tacts from a cellular phone,
select “Always” and then
enable “Automatic Transfer”.
2 Select to transfer all the

contacts from a connected
cellular phone only once.
3 Select to cancel transferring.
3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.
■ For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®

phones
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)

2 Select the desired item.

tacts from the connected
cellular phone.
2 Select to add a new con-

tact manually.
3 Select to cancel transfer-

ring.


When “Transfer” is selected
3 Follow the steps in “For PBAP Incompatible but OPP compatible
Bluetooth® Phones” from step 2 (→P. 387)



When “Add” is selected
3 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list”
from step 2 (→P. 388)

Multimedia

1 Select to transfer the con-

374

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Calling using favorites list
You can make a call using numbers registered in the contact.
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select “Favorites” tab.
3 Select the desired number to make a call.

Dialing from call history
You can make a call using the call history, which has the 3 functions
below.
: calls which you missed
: calls which you received
: calls which you made
1 Display the phone top screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select “Call History” tab.
3 Select


When

or the desired entry from the list.
is selected

4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.


When the desired contact is selected

4 Select the desired number.
5 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ Call history list
● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the contact, the name is displayed in the call history.
● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the call history.
■ International calls
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile
phone in use.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

375

Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed
together with a sound.
To answer the phone
Press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
.

To refuse a call
Press the

switch on the steering wheel or select

To adjust the incoming call volume

■ International calls
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the
cellular phone in use.

Multimedia

Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob.

376

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

To adjust the call volume
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the volume
knob.
To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Select “Mute”.
Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the contact.
1 Select “0-9”.
2 Input the number.

■ Release Tones

“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a “w” is registered in the contact list.
1 Select “Release Tones”.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

377

■ Release Tones
● A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and
the characters “p” or “w”. (e.g.056133w0123p#1∗)
● When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone
will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w”
pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after a user operation is performed.
● Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based
service such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A
phone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact
list.
● Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be operated on voice command during
a call.

To transfer a call
Select “Handset Mode” to change from a hands-free call to a cellular
phone call.
Select “Handset Mode” to off from a cellular phone call to a hands-free
call.
5

Transmit volume setting
Multimedia

1 Select “Transmit Volume”.
2 Select the desired level for the transmit volume.
3 Select “OK”.

To hang up
Press the

switch on the steering wheel or select

378

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming
call message will be displayed.
To talk with the other party:
Press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
.
To refuse the call:
Press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
.

Every time you press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
during call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.
■ Transferring calls
● If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen
will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone
used.
● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■ Call waiting operation
Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular phone.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

379

Bluetooth® phone message function
Received messages can be forwarded from the connected
Bluetooth® phone, enabling checking and replying using the
multimedia system.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone connected, received
messages may not be transferred to the message inbox.
If the phone does not support the message function, this function cannot be used.
Displaying “Message Inbox” screen
1 Press the
2 Select

switch on the steering wheel or press the

button.

on the phone screen.

3 Check

that the “Message
Inbox” screen is displayed.
5

Multimedia

Receiving a message
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen
pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen.
1 E-mail: Select to check the

message.
2 Select to refuse the message.
3 Select to call the message

sender.

380

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

■ Receiving a message
● Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages, or its registration status with the navigation system, some information may not be displayed.
● The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/
MMS messages under the following conditions:
E-mail:
• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full Screen”. (→P. 393)
• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on. (→P. 393)
SMS/MMS:
• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to “Full screen”. (→P. 393)
• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set to on. (→P. 393)

Checking the messages
1 Display the “Message Inbox” screen. (→P. 379)
2 Select the desired message from the list.
3 Check that the message is displayed.

1 E-mails:

Select
“Mark
Unread” or “Mark Read” to
mark mail unread or read on
the “Message Inbox” screen.
This function is available when
“Update Message Read Status
on Phone” is set to on (→P. 393)

2 Select to make a call to the

sender.
3 Select to have messages read out. To cancel this function, select

“Stop”.
4 Select to display the previous or next message.
5 Select to reply the message.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

381

■ Check the messages
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.
● Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth® phone’s
registered mail address folder.
Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.
● Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth® phone can be displayed.
● The text of the message is not displayed while driving.
● When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be automatically read out. (→P. 393)
● Turn the “PWR⋅VOL” knob to adjust the message read out volume.
● The message read out function is available even while driving.

Replying to a message
1 Display the “Message Inbox” screen. (→P. 379)
2 Select the desired message from the list.
3 Select “Quick Message”.
4 Select the desired message.

■ Editing quick reply message

This operation cannot be performed while driving.
1 Select “Quick Message”.
2 Select

corresponding to the desired message to edit.

3 Select “OK” when editing is completed.

Multimedia

5 Select “Send”.

382

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Calling the message sender
Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s phone
number.
1 Display the “Message Inbox” screen. (→P. 379)
2 Select the desired message.
3 Select

4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ Calling from a number within a message

Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area.
1 Display the “Message Inbox” screen. (→P. 379)
2 Select the desired message.
3 Select the text area.
4 Select

corresponding to the desired number.

5 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ Calling from the incoming message screen

→P. 378

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

383

Using the steering wheel switches∗
The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected
cellular phone.
Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches
1 Volume switch

• Increase/Decrease the volume
• Press and hold:
Continuously
increase/
decrease the volume
2 Off hook switch

• Make a call
• Receive a call
• Display “Phone” screen
3 On hook switch

Multimedia

• End a call
• Refuse a call

∗: If equipped

384

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Bluetooth® phone settings
You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.
“Phone/Message Settings” screen
To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button, and
select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
1 Set the phone connection

(→P. 365)
2 Sound Settings (→P. 385)
13 Contact/Call History Settings

(→P. 386)
14 Messaging Settings (→P. 393)
5 Phone Display Settings

(→P. 394)

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

385

Sound setting
1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (→P. 384)
2 Select “Sound Settings” on the “Phone/Message Settings” screen.

1 Set the desired ringtone.
2 Adjust the ringtone volume.
13 Adjust the message readout

volume.
4 Set the desired incoming

SMS/MMS tone.
5 Adjust the incoming SMS/

MMS tone volume.
6 Set the incoming e-mail tone.
7 Adjust the incoming e-mail

tone volume.
8 Adjust the default volume of the other party’s voice.
5

Multimedia

■ To return to the default settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

386

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Contact/Call History Settings
The contact can be transferred from a Bluetooth® phone to the system. The contact also can be added, edited and deleted.
The call history can be deleted and contact and favorites can be
changed.
1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (→P. 384)
2 Select “Contact/Call History Settings”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.

1 For

PBAP
compatible
®
Bluetooth phones, select to
set “Automatic Transfer” on/
off. When set to on, the
phone’s contact data and history are automatically transferred.

2 Select to update contacts

from the connected phone.
(→P. 387)
3 Select to sort contacts by the

first name or last name field.
4 Select to add contacts to the favorites list. (→P. 390)
5 Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. (→P. 392)
6 Select to clear contacts from the call history.
7 Select to add new contacts to the contact list.* (→P. 388)
8 Select to edit contacts in the contact list.* (→P. 389)
9 Select to delete contacts from the contact list.* (→P. 390)
10 Select to reset all setup items.

*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones only, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P. 386)

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

387

Update contacts from phone
Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP
incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones.
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred.
■ For PBAP Compatible Bluetooth® Phones
1 Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.
2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular
phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be
required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
If another Bluetooth® device is connected when transferring contact
data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth® device may
need to be disconnected.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

Phones
1 Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.
2 Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth®

phone.
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular
phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be
required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.
3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.

Multimedia

■ For PBAP Incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®

388

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

■ Updating the contacts in a different way (From the “Call His-

tory” screen)
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P. 386)
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet regis-

tered in the contact list.
3 Select “Update Contact”.
4 Select the desired contact.
5 Select a phone type for the phone number.

Registering a new contact to the contact list
New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can
be registered. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function
is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P. 386)
1 Select “New Contact”.
2 Enter the name and select “OK”.
3 Enter the phone number and select “OK”.
4 Select the phone type for the phone number.
5 To add another number to this contact, select “Yes”.

■ Registering a new contact in a different way (From the “Call

History” screen)
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet regis-

tered in the contact list.
3 Select “Add to Contacts”.
4 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts
list” from step 2 . (→P. 388)

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

389

Editing the contact data
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P. 386)
1 Select “Edit Contact”.
2 Select the desired contact.
3 Select


icon corresponding to the desired name or number.

For editing the name

4 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list”
from step 2 . (→P. 388)


For editing the number

4 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list”
from step 3 . (→P. 388)

■ Editing the contacts in a different way (From the “Contact

Details” screen)
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call history” tab or the “Favorites” tab and

select the desired contact.
“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for
the contact.
4 Follow the steps in “Editing the contact data” from step 3 .

(→P. 389)

Multimedia

3 Select “Edit Contact”.

390

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

Deleting the contact data
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P. 386)
1 Select “Delete Contacts”.
2 Select the desired contact and select “Delete”.
13 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.

■ Deleting the contact in a different way (From the “Contact

Details” screen)
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call history” tab or the “Favorites” tab and

select the desired contact.
3 Select “Delete Contact”.
4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.

Favorites list setting
Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in the favorites list.
■ Registering the contacts in the favorites list
1 Select “Add Favorite”.
2 Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list.

Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite.
3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone


391

When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list
1 When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites

list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears to replace a
contact.
2 Select the contact to be replaced.
3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.


Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contacts” screen)
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the “Contacts” tab.
3 Select

at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be
registered in the favorites list.
When selected,
the favorites list.

, and the contact is registered in

Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contact Details” screen)

1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)

Multimedia



is changed to

2 Select the “Contacts” tab or the “Call History” tab and select the

desired contact.
3 Select “Add Favorite”.
4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.

392

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

■ Deleting the contacts in the favorites list
1 Select “Remove Favorite”.
2 Select the desired contacts and select “Remove”.
3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.


Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contacts” screen)
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the “Contacts” tab.
3 Select

at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted
from the favorites. list.
When selected,
list.



is changed to

, and the data is deleted from the

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contact Details” screen)
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call history” tab or the “Favorites” tab and

select the desired contact to delete.
3 Select “Remove Favorite”.
4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-

tion is complete.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

393

Message Settings
1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (→P. 384)
2 Select “Messaging Settings”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.

1 Set

message

2 Set

message

automatic
transfer on/off.
automatic
readout on/off.

3 Set the SMS/MMS notifica-

tion popup on/off.
4 Set the e-mail notification

popup on/off.
5 Set adding the vehicle signa-

ture to outgoing messages
on/off.
6 Set updating message read status on phone on/off.

7 Change the incoming SMS/MMS display.

8 Change the incoming e-mail display.
“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display
screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen.
“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on
the upper side of the screen.

9 Set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.
When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone
will be displayed.

Multimedia

“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming
SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the
screen.
“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, a message is
displayed on the upper side of the screen.

394

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

■ To return to the default settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
■ Displaying the “Messaging Settings” screen in a different way
1 Display the phone screen. (→P. 370)
2 Select

3 Select “Settings”.

Phone Display Settings
1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (→P. 384)
2 Select “Phone Display Settings”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.

1 Change the incoming call

display.
“Full Screen”: When a call is
received, the hands-free screen
is displayed and can be operated on the screen.
“Drop-Down”: A message is displayed on the upper side of the
screen.

2 Set display of the contact/ history transfer completion message

on/off.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone

395

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth®
device, first check the table below.


When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device

The hands-free system or Bluetooth® device does not work.
The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth® cellular phone.
→ For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed
on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/bluetooth
The Bluetooth version of the connected cellular phone may be older than
the specified version.
→ Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 3.0 with EDR or higher). (→P. 405)

Multimedia

396


5-9. Bluetooth® phone

When registering/connecting a cellular phone

A cellular phone cannot be registered.
An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.
→ Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.
The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone
side.
→ Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve
registration on the phone).
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular
phone.
→ Delete the existing registration information from both this system
and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system. (→P. 364)
A Bluetooth® connection cannot be made.
Another Bluetooth® device is already connected.
→ Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system. (→P. 366)
Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
→ Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.
“Please check your device settings.” message is displayed.
Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
→ Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular
phone.
→ Delete the existing registration information from both this system
and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system. (→P. 364)


When making/receiving a call

A call cannot be made/received.
Your vehicle is in a out of cellular service area.
→ Move to where “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.”
no longer appears on the display.

5-9. Bluetooth® phone


397

When using the contacts

Contact data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.
The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible
with transferring contact data.
→ For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed
on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/bluetooth
Automatic contact transfer function on this system is set to off.
→ Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to on.
(→P. 386)
Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.
→ Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).
Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.
→ Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation on the phone).
Contact data cannot be edited.
Automatic contact transfer function on this system is set to on.
→ Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to off.
(→P. 386)

When using the Bluetooth® message function

Messages cannot be viewed.
Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.
→ Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message
transfer on the phone).
Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.
→ Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (→P. 393)
New message notifications are not displayed.
Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.
→ Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on.
(→P. 393)
Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
→ Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.

Multimedia



398


5-9. Bluetooth® phone

In other situations

Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.
The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.
→ Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.
The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.
→ Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack,
and then restart the cellular phone.
→ Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth® connection.
→ Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applications.
→ Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its source and how its operation might affect this system.

5-10. Using the voice command system

399

Voice command system
The voice command system enables the hands-free system to
be operated using voice commands.
Operations of the voice command system can be performed by
selecting the menu corresponding to each function on the
screen. Even if any menu is selected, commands displayed on
all menus can be operated.
Using the voice command system
1 Press the talk switch.

tion.
2 Select to start the voice rec-

ognition tutorial.

2 Select “OK” and say the desired command.

On the list screen, you can select the desired command.
To cancel the voice command system, press and hold the talk
switch.

Multimedia

1 Select to train voice recogni-

400

5-10. Using the voice command system

■ Microphone
→P. 371
■ When using the microphone
● It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.
● Voice commands may not be recognized if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.
● In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command
properly and using voice commands may not be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.

Casual speech recognization
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system
enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However,
the system cannot recognize every variation of each command.
In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the desired operation.
Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut menu.
This function is available in English, Spanish and French.
■ Expression examples for each function
Command
“Call
”

Expression examples

Get me .
Call on phone.

“Dial ”

Dial <3334445555>.
Get me <3334445555>.

5-10. Using the voice command system

401

Mobile Assistant
The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free
mode via the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible cellular phone must be registered and connected to
this system via Bluetooth®. (→P. 363)
1 Press and hold the

until

you hear the beeps.

2 The Mobile Assistant can be

■ Adjusting the Mobile Assistant volume

The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the
“PWR/VOL” knob of steering wheel volume switches. The Mobile
Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized.

Multimedia

used only when the following
screen is displayed.
To cancel the Mobile Assistant,
select “Cancel”, or press and
hold the
on the steering
wheel.
To restart the Mobile Assistant
for additional commands, press
the
on the steering wheel.
• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds
to a voice command.
• After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant
feature will automatically end to complete the requested action.

402

5-10. Using the voice command system

■ Notes about Mobile Assistant
● The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version
installed on the connected device.
● Some Siri® features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an
unavailable function, Siri® will inform you that the function is not available.
● If Siri® is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth®, an
error message will be displayed on the screen.
● While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used.
● If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio
source is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction
prompts.

5-11. Bluetooth®

403

Bluetooth®

Multimedia

■ When using the Bluetooth® audio system
● In the following conditions, the system may not function.
• If the portable audio player is turned off
• If the portable audio player is not connected
• If the portable audio player’s battery is low
● There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during
Bluetooth® audio play.
● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■ When using the hands-free system
● The multimedia system is muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may
deteriorate and connection status may deteriorate.
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a window is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the cellular phone is turned off
● If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage
● If the cellular phone is not connected
● If the cellular phone’s battery is low
● When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines,
etc.
● When the cellular phone itself cannot be used
● When transferring contact data from the cellular phone

404

5-11. Bluetooth®

■ Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display.
If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console
box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may
deteriorate.
If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or
covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/signal status
● This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or
cellular phone itself.
● This system does not have a charging function.
● The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly
when the device is connected to Bluetooth®.
■ When using the Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same
time
The following problems may occur.
● The Bluetooth® audio connection may be interrupted.
● Noise may be heard during Bluetooth® audio playback.
■ About the contact in this system
The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When
another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
● Contact data
● Call history
● Favorite
● Message
When removing a Bluetooth® phone from the system, the above-mentioned
data is also deleted.

5-11. Bluetooth®

405

Multimedia

■ Compatible models
The Bluetooth® audio system supports portable audio players with the following specifications
● Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)
● Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the multimedia system.
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the
type of portable audio player connected.
The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifications.
● Bluetooth® specification:
Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)
● Profiles:
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or
higher)
This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or
head set. It has outgoing and incoming call functions.
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)
This is a profile to transfer contact data. When a Bluetooth® compatible
cellular phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended:
Ver. 1.1)
This is a profile to transfer contact data.
If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the
hands-free system. OPP, PBAP services must be selected individually.

406

5-11. Bluetooth®

■ Reconnecting the portable audio player
If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the
engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system automatically
reconnects the portable audio player.
If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions below to reconnect:
● Select the portable audio player again
● Enter the portable audio player
■ When you sell your car
Be sure to delete your personal data. (→P. 331)
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not use the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to
the Bluetooth® system.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves
may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation
under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.

5-11. Bluetooth®

407

NOTICE
■ When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The
inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable
audio player or cellular phone.

Multimedia

408

5-12. Antenna

Antenna
Removing the antenna
1 Place

the included
around the antenna.

wrench

When not in use, the wrench is
stored in glove box.

2 Loosen the antenna with the

wrench and remove it.

Installing the antenna
1 Tighten the antenna by one

hand until it will not turn any
more.

2 Using the wrench, tighten the

antenna an additional 1/8th turn
(20 to 45 degrees) to secure it
in place.
After tightening the
remove the wrench.

antenna,

5-12. Antenna

409

■ About the wrench
After using the included wrench, store it in the glove box for safekeeping.
NOTICE

Multimedia

■ To avoid damaging the antenna
Remove the antenna in the following situations.
● When using an automatic carwash.
● When the antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage, etc.
● When covering the vehicle with a car cover.
■ Removing the antenna
● For normal driving, make sure the antenna is installed.
● When removing the antenna to use an automatic carwash, etc., be careful
not to lose the antenna. Also, make sure to reinstall the antenna before
driving the vehicle.
■ Using the wrench
● When installing or removing the antenna, use the included wrench.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the vehicle body with the wrench.
● Do not over-tighten the antenna.
Over-tightening may damage the antenna.
● Do not use any tools other than the included wrench to install or remove
the antenna.
Otherwise damage may result on the antenna’s finish.

410

5-12. Antenna

411

Interior features

6-1. Using the air conditioning
system
Manual air conditioning
system............................. 412
Automatic air conditioning
system............................. 419
Seat heaters/
seat ventilators................ 426
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................ 429
• Personal/interior lights
main switch ................... 430
• Personal/interior
lights ............................. 430
• Cargo lamp main
switch............................ 431

6
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features ..... 432
• Glove box...................... 434
• Console box (front
separated type seat) ..... 435
• Card holder ................... 436
• Map holder (front
bench type seat) ........... 438
• Pen holder .................... 439
• Tissue pocket................ 440
• Overhead console......... 441
• Cup holders .................. 442
• Bottle holders................ 444
• Auxiliary boxes (front
bench type seat) ........... 445
• Storage box .................. 447
Luggage compartment
features ........................... 449
6-4. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ....... 450
• Sun visors ..................... 450
• Vanity mirrors................ 450
• Clock............................. 451
• Power outlets ................ 452
• Armrest ......................... 454
• Assist grips ................... 455
Garage door opener.......... 456
Compass........................... 465

412

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

Manual air conditioning system∗
Air conditioning controls

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or
counterclockwise (cool).
If
is not pressed, the
system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.
For quick cooling, turn the temperature control dial to the “MAX
A/C” position.
The air conditioning will automatically turn on and the air intake selector
will be set to recirculated air mode.

∗: If equipped

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

413

■ Fan speed setting

To adjust the fan speed, turn
the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “OFF” turns
off the fan.

■ Change the airflow mode

To select the airflow, set the air
outlet selector dial to the
desired position.
The positions between the air
outlet selections can also be
selected for more delicate
adjustment.

■ Other functions
6

Interior features

● Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
(→P. 414)
● Defogging the windshield (→P. 414)
● Defogging the back window (CrewMax models) (→P. 414)
● Defogging the outside rear view mirrors (if equipped) (→P. 414)
● Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped) (→P. 415)

414

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

Other functions
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press

The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from
outside the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is
pressed.
■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.
Set the air outlet selector dial to
position.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and
temperature up.
■ Defogging the back window (CrewMax models)

Defogger is used to defog the back window.
Press

The defogger will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
■ Defogging the outside rear view mirrors (if equipped)

Defogger is used to defog to remove raindrops, dew and frost from
the outside rear view mirrors.
Press

The defogger will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
CrewMax models: Turning the back window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

415

■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.
Press

The defogger will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
Double Cab models: Turning the outside rear view mirror defoggers on will
turn the windshield wiper de-icer on.
CrewMax models: Turning the back window defogger on will turn the windshield wiper de-icer on.

Air outlets
■ Location of air outlets

Air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected airflow mode.

*
*: CrewMax models

■ Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets

Front
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.

Interior features



416

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

1 Open the vent
2 Close the vent



Rear (CrewMax models)

1 Direct air flow to the left or right,

up or down.
2 Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

417

■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning

on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the

windshield effectively.
● If you turn

off, the windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective
in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling
operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior
effectively.
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and air conditioning
system is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also
reduce fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch
is in the “ON” position.

● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

Interior features

■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when
pressed.

418

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
● Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers to
defog.

■ To prevent burns (vehicles with rear view mirror defoggers and windshield wiper de-icer)
● Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.
● Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the
front pillars, when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

419

Automatic air conditioning system∗
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
Air conditioning controls

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

Interior features

To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or
counterclockwise (cool).
The air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous mode each time
is pressed. (→P. 420)
■ Fan speed setting

To adjust the fan speed, press “∧” on

to increase the fan speed

and “∨” to decrease the fan speed.
Press

to turn the fan off.

∗: If equipped

420

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

■ Change the airflow mode

To change the airflow, press

Air outlets are adjusted each time the button is pressed.
■ Other functions

● Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
(→P. 421)
● Defogging the windshield (→P. 421)
● Defogging the back window (CrewMax models) (→P. 421)
● Defogging the outside rear view mirrors (if equipped) (→P. 421)
● Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped) (→P. 422)
Using by automatic mode
1 Press

2 Adjust the temperature setting.
3 To stop the operation, press

■ Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated are maintained.
■ Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats sep-

arately (“SYNC” mode)
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous mode each time
is pressed.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on
is on):
The driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the
temperature for driver’s and front passenger’s side. At this time,
operate the front passenger’s side temperature control dial to enter
individual mode.
Individual mode (the indicator on
is off):
The temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s side can be
adjusted separately.

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

421

Other functions
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.
Press

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.) To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is
defogged.
■ Defogging the back window (CrewMax models)

Defogger is used to defog the back window.
Press

The defogger will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

■ Defogging the outside rear view mirrors (if equipped)

Press

The defogger will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
CrewMax models: Turning the back window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

Interior features

Defogger is used to defog to remove raindrops, dew and frost from
the outside rear view mirrors.

422

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.
Press

Air outlets
■ Location of air outlets

Air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected airflow mode.

*
*: CrewMax models
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air out-

lets


Front
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

423

1 Open the vent
2 Close the vent



Rear (CrewMax models)

1 Direct air flow to the left or right,

up or down.
2 Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

Interior features

424

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and
the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after

is pressed.

■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
● If you turn

off, the windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During
cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle
interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the
temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also
reduce fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch
is in the “ON” position.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when

is selected.

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

425

■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 513
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
● Do not use
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

Interior features

● Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers to
defog.

426

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

Seat heaters∗/seat ventilators∗
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain
good airflow by blowing air from the seats.
Seat heaters
Turns the seat heater on
1 Hi
2 Mid
3 Lo
4 Off
The level indicator lights come on.
Press the “∧” on the button to up
and “∨” to down, and off.

Seat ventilators
■ Seat heater

Turns the seat heater on
1 Hi
2 Mid
3 Lo
4 Off
The level indicator lights come on.
Pressing the button changes
modes in the following:
Hi→Mid→Lo→Off

∗: If equipped

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

427

■ Seat ventilators

Blows air from the seat
1 Hi
2 Mid
3 Lo
4 Off
The level indicator lights come on.
Pressing the button changes
modes in the following:
Hi→Mid→Lo→Off

■ The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Passenger seat ventilator timer (vehicles with seat ventilators)
● The ventilator operates on for 5 minutes after the button is pressed.
● When the passenger is not detected, the automatically turns off the ventilator after 5 minutes.
■ When not in use
Turn the seat heaters or seat ventilators off by pressing the button. The indicator light turns off.

■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
● Do not use seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor
burns or overheating.

Interior features

WARNING

428

6-1. Using the air conditioning system

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters/seat ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters/seat ventilators off when the engine is not running.

6-2. Using the interior lights

429

Interior lights list

1 Outer foot lights (if equipped)

4 Foot well lighting (if equipped)

2 Personal/interior lights

5 Cargo lamp

(→P. 431)

(→P. 430)
equipped)

switch

light

(if

Interior features

3 Engine

430

6-2. Using the interior lights

Personal/interior lights main switch
1 “OFF”
The personal/interior lights can be
individually turned on or off.

2 “DOOR”
The personal/interior lights come
on when a door is opened. They
turn off when the doors are closed.

3 “ON”
The personal/interior lights cannot be individually turned off.

Personal/interior lights
■ Front

On/off

■ Rear


Type A
On/off

6-2. Using the interior lights


431

Type B
On/off

Cargo lamp main switch
1 “OFF”
The cargo lamp can be individually
turned on or off.

2 “DOOR”
The cargo lamp comes on when a
door is opened. They turn off when
the doors are closed.

3 “ON”
The cargo lamp cannot be individually turned off.
6

Interior features

■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/
closed.
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the main
switch is in the “DOOR” position, the lights will go off automatically after 20
minutes:
● Personal lights
● Interior lights
● Cargo lamp
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 624)

432

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features


Front separated type seats

1 Bottle holders

(→P. 444)

2 Card holder

(→P. 436)

3 Overhead console (→P. 441)
4 Glove box

(→P. 434)

5 Front cup holders

(→P. 442)

6 Console box

• Card holder
• Pen holder
• Tissue pocket

(→P. 435)
(→P. 436)
(→P. 439)
(→P. 440)

7 Rear cup holders (if equipped)

(→P. 443)
8 Storage box (if equipped)

(→P. 447)

6-3. Using the storage features


433

Front bench type seat

1 Auxiliary boxes

2 Bottle holders

(→P. 444)

3 Card holder

(→P. 436)

4 Overhead console (→P. 441)

5 Glove box

(→P. 434)

6 Front cup holders

(→P. 442)

7 Pen holder

(→P. 439)

8 Rear cup holders (if equipped)

(→P. 443)
9 Storage box (if equipped)

(→P. 447)

Interior features

• Card holder
• Map holder
• Tissue pocket

(→P. 445)
(→P. 436)
(→P. 438)
(→P. 440)

434

6-3. Using the storage features

WARNING
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may result in the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
■ When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use
Keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur
due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

Glove box
1 Open (pull the lever up)
2 Lock
3 Unlock

6-3. Using the storage features

435

Console box (front separated type seat)
Pull the knob up and lift the lid

■ Passing a cable from the console box
6

Interior features

436

6-3. Using the storage features

Card holder
■ Overhead console

■ Console box (front separated type seats)

Pull the knob up and lift the lid

6-3. Using the storage features

437

■ Back of the front center seatback (front bench type seat)
1 Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback

2 Push the knob and lift the lid

Interior features

438

6-3. Using the storage features

Map holder (front bench type seat)
1 Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback

2 Push the knob and lift the lid

6-3. Using the storage features

439

Pen holder


Front separated type seats
Pull the knob up and lift the lid



Front bench type seat
Pull the lever up and fold down
the seatback

Interior features

440

6-3. Using the storage features

Tissue pocket


Front separated type seats
Pull the knob up and lift the lid



Front bench type seat

1 Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback

6-3. Using the storage features

441

2 Push the knob and lift the lid

Overhead console
The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
Push the knob forward to open the
console

Interior features

442

6-3. Using the storage features

Cup holders
■ Front


Separated type seats



Bench type seat
Pull the lever up and fold down
the seatback

6-3. Using the storage features

443

■ Rear


Double Cab models with front separated type seats
Pull the lid down



Double Cab models with front bench type seat
Pull the lid down



CrewMax models

Pull the armrest down
Interior features

WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent
burns.

444

6-3. Using the storage features

Bottle holders


Front door



Rear door (CrewMax models)

WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holders
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
NOTICE
■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.

6-3. Using the storage features

445

Auxiliary boxes (front bench type seat)


Type A
Pull the strap



Type B

1 Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback

2 Push the knob and lift the lid

Interior features

446


6-3. Using the storage features

Type C

1 Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback

2 Push the knob and lift the lid

6-3. Using the storage features

447

Storage box (if equipped)
■ Using the storage box
1 Pull the lever up and raise the

rear seat cushion

2 Open the lid

1 Turn the knob in the “OPEN”

direction
2 Lift the lid

Interior features

448

6-3. Using the storage features

■ Remove the storage box
1 Pull the lever up and raise the

rear seat cushion

2 Open the lid

1 Turn the knob in the “OPEN”

direction
2 Lift the lid

3 Remove the storage box

1 Remove the lids
2 Turn the knobs counterclock-

wise
3 Remove the storage box

WARNING
■ To prevent damage to the storage box
Do not put heavy loads on the lids.

6-3. Using the storage features

449

Luggage compartment features
Deck hooks
Deck hooks are provided for
securing loose items.

Interior features

450

6-4. Using the other interior features

Other interior features
Sun visors
1 To set the visor in the forward

position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side posi-

tion, flip down, unhook, and
swing it to the side.
3 To use the side extender, place

the visor in the side position,
then slide it backward.
Vanity mirrors (if equipped)
Open the cover
The light turns on when the cover
is opened.

NOTICE
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is
stopped.

451

6-4. Using the other interior features

Clock
The clock is displayed on the
screen.

■ Setting the clock


Vehicles with Entune Audio (Multimedia system types: →P. 322)
→P. 331



Vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio
(Multimedia system types: →P. 322)
Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

MULTIMEDIA

■ The clock is displayed when
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The clock data will be reset.

SYSTEM

Interior features

452

6-4. Using the other interior features

Power outlets
Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than
12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W).
When using electronic goods, make sure that the power consumption
of all the connected power outlets is less than 120 W.


Type A (instrument panel)
Open the lid.



Type B (back of the front center seatback)
Open the lid.

6-4. Using the other interior features


453

Type C (back of the front center seatback)
Open the lid.



Type D (inside of the console box)
Pull the knob up and lift the lid,
and open the lid.

Type E (back of the console box)
Open the lid.

Interior features



454


6-4. Using the other interior features

Type F (back of the console box)
Open the lid.

■ The power outlets can be used when
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ Passing a cable from the console box (type D)
→P. 435
NOTICE
● Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short
circuit.
● Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.

Armrest (CrewMax models)
Fold down the armrest for use.

NOTICE
Do not apply too much load on the armrest.

6-4. Using the other interior features

455

Assist grips
An assist grip (type A) installed on the ceiling can be used to support
your body while sitting on the seat.
An assist grip (type B) installed on the pillar can be used when getting
in or out of the vehicle and others.
1 Assist grip (type A)
2 Assist grip (type B)

WARNING
■ Assist grip (type A)
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from
your seat.
Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself
by falling over.

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

Interior features

NOTICE

456

6-4. Using the other interior features

Garage door opener∗
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems,
security systems, and other devices.
HomeLink®
The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming methods on the following pages to determine the
method which is appropriate for the device.
1 HomeLink® indicator light
2 Garage door operation indica-

tors
3 Buttons

■ Before programming the HomeLink®

● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or
other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to
prevent injury or other potential harm.
● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote
control transmitter for more accurate programming.
● Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be
equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may
need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the
“learn” or “smart” button on the garage door opener motor.

∗: If equipped

6-4. Using the other interior features

457

■ Programming the HomeLink®

Steps 1 through 3 must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not
be able to be completed.
1 Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program

and check that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes orange.
2 Point

the remote control
transmitter for the device at
the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink® buttons.

Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.
3 Program a device.


Programming a device
other than an entry gate
(for U.S.A. owners)



Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming
a device in the Canadian market

Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light
changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green
(rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code).

Interior features

Press and hold the remote
control transmitter button
until the HomeLink® indicator
light changes from slowly
flashing orange to rapidly
flashing green (rolling code)
or continuously lit green
(fixed code), then release the
button.

458

6-4. Using the other interior features

4 Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly pro-

grammed button and observing the indicator light:
● Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device
has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink® button is pressed and released.
● Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor
or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete
programming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink® button for
2 seconds then release it.
● If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed
to “Programming a rolling code system”.
5 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the

remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code system

2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming.
1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”

button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the unit. The
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
Refer to the Owner’s manual
supplied with the garage door
opener motor for details.
2 Press

and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2 .

6-4. Using the other interior features

459

3 Press and hold the desired

HomeLink® button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this
sequence
(press/hold/
release) up to 3 times to
complete programming.
If the garage door opener
motor operates when the
button
is
HomeLink®
pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink® signal.
■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only avail-

able for compatible devices)
When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators
in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener
motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility,
refer to www.HomeLink.com.)

1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has

If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10
presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been
completed.

Interior features

been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to
HomeLink®, both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will
blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

460

6-4. Using the other interior features

2 Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage

door.
3 Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the

garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the
establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door
opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will
flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor
will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button

When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already
have devices registered to them can be overwritten:
1 With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
2 When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing orange, release

the HomeLink® button and perform “Programming the HomeLink®” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to
start flashing).
Operating the HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator
light should turn on.

6-4. Using the other interior features

461

Garage door operation indicators
The status of the opening and
closing of a garage door is shown
by the indicators.
1 Opening
2 Closing
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is
a compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.HomeLink.com.)
Color

Status

Orange (flashing)

Currently opening/closing

Green

Opening/closing has completed

Red (flashing)

Feedback signals cannot be received

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of
the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the
garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback
signals from the garage door may not be received.
To recall the previous door operation status, press and release
and

and

simultaneously. The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

Interior features

either HomeLink® buttons

462

6-4. Using the other interior features

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the
indicator
light
HomeLink®
changes from continuously lit
orange to rapidly flashing green.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
■ Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory
● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button
that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not
be erased.
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink®.

6-4. Using the other interior features

463

Interior features

■ Certification for the garage door opener
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLAECHL5
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
REMARQUE:
Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisee aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi,
meme si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/toyota or call 1-800-355-3515.
■ About HomeLink®
HomeLink and the HomeLink house icon are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

464

6-4. Using the other interior features

WARNING
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and
objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
■ When operating or programming HomeLink®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.

6-4. Using the other interior features

465

Compass∗
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.
Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press and hold the button for 3
seconds.

Displays and directions
Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

Interior features

Display

∗: If equipped

466

6-4. Using the other interior features

Calibrating the compass

Samoa: 5

Guam: 8

Saipan: 8

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to
the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will
deviate.
To obtain higher precision of accurate calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the button for

6 seconds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on
the compass display.

3 Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the num-

ber of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.

6-4. Using the other interior features

467

■ Circling calibration
1 Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
2 Press and hold the button for

9 seconds.
“C” appears on the compass
display.

3 Drive the vehicle at 5 mph

(8 km/h) or less in a circle
until a direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is displayed.

Interior features

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under
a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.

468

6-4. Using the other interior features

WARNING
■ When driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in
the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid the compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

469

Maintenance and care

7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.......... 470
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior........... 473
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ................... 476
General maintenance........ 478
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs......................... 481

7
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ..................... 482
Hood ................................. 484
Engine compartment......... 485
Tires .................................. 495
Tire inflation pressure ....... 507
Wheels .............................. 510
Air conditioning filter.......... 513
Wireless remote control
battery ............................. 516
Checking and replacing
fuses ............................... 518
Light bulbs......................... 521

470

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in
prime condition:
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors and remove the antenna before washing the vehicle. Start
washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the antenna
and extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of
the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is
closed properly.

7-1. Maintenance and care

471

■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components, etc., to catch fire.
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has
cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

Maintenance and care

472

7-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels, etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ Antenna installation and removal precautions
● Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
● When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car
wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,
before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
■ When using a high pressure car wash
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured
cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they
come into contact with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
■ Cleaning the high mounted stoplight and cargo lamps
When using high-pressured car washers, the tip of the nozzle should be at
least 20 in. (50 cm) from the car body. Water can seep lamp housing or the
vehicle cabin if the nozzle is closer to the car body.

7-1. Maintenance and care

473

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior
and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with
neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and water.
Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
Maintenance and care

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted
to approximately 1%.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and water.

474

7-1. Maintenance and care

■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to
maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge
or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.
Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the
carpet could be damaged.
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components, etc., to malfunction or catch
fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 40)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect
off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.

7-1. Maintenance and care

475

NOTICE

Maintenance and care

■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Toyota
Safety Sense P)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
(→P. 226)
■ Cleaning the inside of the back window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the back window, as this may cause
damage to the back window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

476

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to
perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:
General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can
be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty
coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if
a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

7-2. Maintenance

477

■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedure described below:
1

Press “<” or “>” of meter control switches and select
mation display.

on the multi-infor-

Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “Vehicle Settings”, and
then press
.
Press “∧” or “∨” of meter control switches and select “Maintenance Reset”,
and then press
.
Select the “YES” and press

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with
the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations
of all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take
care of it.
WARNING

Maintenance and care

■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible death or serious injury.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (→P. 492)

478

7-2. Maintenance

General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem
you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota
dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items

Check points

Battery

Check the connections.

(→P. 492)

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the correct level?

(→P. 490)

Engine coolant

Is the engine coolant at the correct level?(→P. 488)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the correct level?

Exhaust system

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

Power steering fluid

Is the power steering fluid at correct level?
(→P. 491)

Radiator/condenser

The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects.
(→P. 490)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient washer fluid?

(→P. 486)

(→P. 494)

7-2. Maintenance

479

Vehicle interior
Items

Check points

Accelerator pedal

• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly
(without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Automatic transmission
“Park” mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is
in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?
(→P. 607)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct
amount of free play?
(→P. 607)

Brakes

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when
the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too close to
the floor when the brakes are applied.

Head restraints

• Do the head restraints move smoothly and
lock securely?

Indicators/buzzers

• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

Parking brake

• Does the parking brake pedal move
smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the parking
brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the correct
amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Maintenance and care

Seat belts

480

7-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior
Items

Check points

Doors

• Do the doors operate smoothly?

Engine hood

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage
after the vehicle has been parked.

Tires

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

Lights

• Do all the lights come on?

Windshield wipers

• The wiper blades should not show any signs
of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or
deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear the windshield
without streaking or skipping.

WARNING
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

7-2. Maintenance

481

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system
monitors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the
emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and
may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the
vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary
malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

Maintenance and care

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

482

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
(→P. 492)

Parts and tools
• Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level
(→P. 490)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

Engine coolant
level (→P. 488)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high
quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with
50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with
55% coolant and 45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

Engine oil level
(→P. 486)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses
(→P. 518)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Light bulbs
(→P. 521)

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver

Power steering
fluid level
(→P. 491)

• Wrench

• Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding power steering fluid)

Radiator and
condenser
(→P. 490)

⎯

Tire inflation
pressure
(→P. 507)

• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source

Washer fluid
(→P. 494)

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

483

WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc., right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is off.
With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fan may
automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 490)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.,
from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE

Maintenance and care

■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.

484

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1 Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever

and lift the hood.

WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

485

Engine compartment

1 Washer fluid tank (→P. 494)

6 Fuse box

(→P. 518)

2 Engine oil level dipstick

7 Battery

(→P. 492)

8 Radiator

(→P. 490)

(→P. 486)
3 Engine coolant reservoir

(→P. 488)
4 Engine oil filler cap (→P. 487)

(→P. 490)

10 Condenser

(→P. 490)

11 Power steering fluid reservoir

(→P. 491)

Maintenance and care

5 Brake fluid reservoir

9 Cooling fan

486

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine

and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
2 Holding a rag under the end,

pull the dipstick out.

3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5 Holding a rag under the end,

pull the dipstick out and
check the oil level.
1 Low
2 Normal
3 Excessive

The shape of the dipstick
may differ depending on the
type of vehicle or engine.
6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

487

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
Engine oil selection

→P. 602

Oil quantity
(Low → Full)

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Items

Clean funnel

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Maintenance and care

■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following
situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be
refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or
when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic

488

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information
concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
1 Reservoir cap
2 “FULL” line
3 “LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to
the “FULL” line. (→P. 585)

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

489

■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.(→P. 587)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
7

Maintenance and care

■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

490

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Items

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

491

WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

Power steering fluid
■ Fluid level

The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
1 Full (when cold)
2 Add fluid (when cold)
3 Full (when hot)
4 Add fluid (when hot)

Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20
minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid
temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C])

Cold:

Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C])

Maintenance and care

Hot:

492

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Checking the fluid level

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III

Items

Rag or paper, clean funnel (only for adding fluid)

1 Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
2 Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinstall the cap and remove it again.
5 Check the fluid level.

WARNING
■ Checking the fluid level
Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■ When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■ After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or
damage.

Battery
Check the battery as follows:
■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
1 Terminals
2 Hold-down clamp

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

493

■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
WARNING

Maintenance and care

■ Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.

494

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

Washer fluid
Add washer fluid in the following
situations:
● A washer does not work.
● The warning message appears
on the display.

WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as
damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

495

Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
Checking tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check
the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the
tread.
Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

1 New tread
2 Worn tread
3 Treadwear indicator

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
tire rotation.

Front

Maintenance and care

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “Δ”
mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

496

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
● The tire pressure detected by
the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the
multi-information display.

● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a screen display and a warning light.

◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure
warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be
initialized.

◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-

lowing circumstances:
● When rotating the tires.
● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing tire size. (When there are multiple specified pressures)
● After registering the ID codes. (→P. 498)
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

497

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation

pressure level. (→P. 607)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate
based on this pressure level.
3 Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
4 Press and hold the tire pres-

sure warning reset switch
until the tire pressure warning light blinks 3 times.
A message is displayed on the
multi-information display. Also,
“--” is displayed for inflation
pressure of each tire on the
multi-information display while
the tire pressure warning system determines the position.

mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
Initialization is complete when the position of each tire is determined
and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multi-information display.
Initialization may take longer than approximately 30 minutes in certain situations, such as when the vehicle is stopped for a long time at
traffic lights, etc. (→P. 503)

Maintenance and care

5 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approxi-

498

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

◆ Registering ID codes
Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID
code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter,
it is necessary to register the ID codes.
To register the ID codes, perform the following procedure:
1 Press the tire pressure warn-

ing reset switch 3 times until
the tire pressure warning
light blinks slowly 3 times.
Then a message will be displayed on multi-information
display. When registration is
being performed, the tire pressure warning light will blink for
approximately 1 minute then
illuminate and “--” will be displayed for the inflation pressure of each tire on the multiinformation display.

2 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approxi-

mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
Registration is complete when the tire pressure warning light
turns off and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the
multi-information display.
Registration may take longer than approximately 30 minutes in
certain situations, such as when the vehicle is stopped for a long
time at traffic lights, etc. (→P. 503)
After registering the ID codes, make sure to initialize the tire
pressure warning system. (→P. 496)

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

499

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size
or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■ When replacing the tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the
replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
7

Maintenance and care

For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the tire,
see the load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (→P. 614)

500

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire types
● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all
season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 312)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

501

■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not oper-

Maintenance and care

ate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate
properly.
• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains, etc., are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified
level.
• If wheel without the tire pressure warning valve and tranmitter is
used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitter is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large
display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or
electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or
other wireless communication device
If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio
wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing
the radio wave conditions.
● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go
off could be extended.
● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has
burst, the warning may not function.

502

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pres-

sure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire
inflation pressure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the engine switch off during initialization,
it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will
restart automatically when the engine switch has been turned to the
“ON” position for the next time.
● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the
tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.
● While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the
inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come
on.
■ Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason,
the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a
low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was
adjusted to when the system was initialized.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

503

■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization may take longer to complete if the vehicle is driven on an
unpaved road. When performing initialization, drive on a paved road if
possible. Depending on the driving environment and condition of the tires,
initialization will be completed in approximately 10 to 30 minutes. If initialization is not complete after driving approximately 10 to 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.
If the inflation pressure of each tire is not displayed after driving for
approximately 1 hour, perform the following procedure.
● Park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes. Then
drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
However, in the following situations, the tire inflation pressure will not be
recorded and the system will not operate properly. Perform initialization
again.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure
warning light does not blink 3 times.
● After performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute then stays on while driving about 20 minutes.
If the inflation pressure of each tire is still not displayed, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Maintenance and care

504

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire pressure warning system certification
 For

vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

TRW Automotive
Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor
FCC ID: GQ4-72T
FCC ID: GQ4-49R
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by TRW
Automotive U.S. LLC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada

TRW Automotive
Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor
Model: 335098
IC: 1470A-53T
MADE IN U.S.A
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes : 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage. 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by TRW
Automotive U.S. LLC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

505

NOTE
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du
dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Maintenance and care

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first
adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the
tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation
pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.

506

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,

transmitters and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not
installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the
tire pressure warning valves could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 496)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads
may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s
wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

507

Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading
information label. (→P. 607)

Maintenance and care

508

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Inspection and adjustment procedure
1 Tire valve
2 Tire pressure gauge

1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust

the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and

adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once
a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

509

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire
inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as
heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after
driving.
● Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is
balanced.
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and
cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

Maintenance and care

Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur
which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards,
expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

510

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and
inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)
● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

511

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 496)
■ When installing the wheel ornament (on some models)
Align the notch of the wheel and ornament.

WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in

the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
■ When installing the wheel nuts
● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with

Tapered
portion

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Maintenance and care

the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.

512

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

513

Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain
air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the glove box.

3 Remove the tray.

while pulling toward you.

Maintenance and care

4 Remove the cover by sliding up

514

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

5 Remove the filter cover.

6 Pull the filter out of the filter out-

let.

Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning filter
and replace it with a new one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

515

NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.

Maintenance and care

516

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wireless remote control battery∗
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2016
Replacing the battery
1 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
To prevent the buttons from being
disassembled, face the button surface downward.

2 Remove the module.

3 Open the case cover using a

coin protected with tape, etc.,
and remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.

∗: If equipped

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

517

■ Use a CR2016 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance
shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
■ Certification for the lithium battery
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN
INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO
THE INSTRUCTIONS
NOTICE
7

Maintenance and care

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

518

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may
have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.


Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the
cover off.



Under the instrument panel
Remove the cover.

3 Remove the fuse with the pull-

out tool.
Only type A fuse can be removed
using the pullout tool.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

519

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

1 Normal fuse
2 Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box cover.
Type C:
Contact your Toyota dealer.


Type A



Type C



Type B

Maintenance and care

■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (→P. 521)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

520

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

521

Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty
level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your
Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact
your Toyota dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 609)
Bulb locations
■ Front

2 Front turn signal lights/parking lights (bulb type)
3 Front side marker lights
4 Fog lights (bulb type) (if equipped)

Maintenance and care

1 Headlights (bulb type)

522

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear

1 Stop/tail and rear side marker lights
2 Back up lights
3 Rear turn signal lights
4 License plate lights
5 High mounted stoplight and cargo lamps

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

523

Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlights (bulb type)
1 To

allow enough working
space, turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of
the bulb to be replaced.
Remove the screws and
fender liner clip, and remove
the fender liner.
Turn the steering wheel to the
left when replacing the right side
light bulb, and turn the steering
wheel to the right when replacing the left side light bulb.

2 Open the fender liner and

unplug the connector.

Maintenance and care

524

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

3 Remove the rubber cover.

4 Release the bulb retaining

spring.

5 Remove the bulb.

6 Set the new light bulb.

To install a new bulb, align tabs
of the bulb with the cutouts of
the mounting hole.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

7 Install

the

bulb

525

retaining

spring.

8 Install the rubber cover.

When installing
cover: →P. 535

the

rubber

9 Install the connector.

Maintenance and care

526

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

10 Reinstall the fender liner and

install the screws and clip.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

527

■ Front turn signal/parking lights (bulb type headlights)
1 Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

2 Remove the light bulb.

■ Front turn signal lights (LED type headlights)
1 Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Maintenance and care

2 Remove the light bulb.

528

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front side marker lights
1 To

2 Open the fender liner and

turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

529

3 Remove the light bulb.

4 Reinstall the fender liner and

install the screws and clip.

Maintenance and care

530

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front fog lights-bulb type (if equipped)
1 To

2 Unplug the connector while

depressing the lock release.

3 Turn the bulb counterclock-

wise.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

531

4 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn it clockwise to set.

5 Install the connector.

Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn
the fog lights, on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

6 Reinstall the fender liner and

install the screws and clip.

Maintenance and care

532

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Stop/tail and rear side marker lights, back-up lights and rear

turn signal lights
1 Remove the bolts and rear

combination assembly.

2 Turn the bulb bases counter-

clockwise.
1 Rear turn signal light
2 Back-up light
3 Stop/tail

and rear side
marker light

3 Remove the light bulb.

1 Rear turn signal light
2 Back-up light
3 Stop/tail

and rear side
marker light

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

533

■ License plate lights
1 Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

2 Remove the light bulb.

Maintenance and care

534

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ High mounted stoplight and cargo lamps
1 Remove

the

screws

and

cover.

2 Remove the light bulb.

1 High mounted stoplight
2 Cargo lamps
When reinstalling the outer lens,
confirm that the packing is properly seated in the groove on the
housing.

Packing

■ Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
● Daytime running lights/parking lights (LED type)
● Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
● Outer foot lights (if equipped)

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

535

■ When installing the rubber cover of the headlight
Ensure the rubber cover is securely attached.
1 Fit the rubber cover outer circumfer-

ence in firmly.
2 Fit the rubber cover around the light

bulb in until the light bulb plug can be
seen.

■ When replacing the light bulbs
Confirm that they are properly engaged with the bulb base and that there is
no light leakage.
■ LED Lights
The headlights (LED type), front fog lights (LED type), parking lights (LED
type), daytime running light and side turn signal lights consist of a number of
LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to
have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not
indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the
following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
7

Maintenance and care

536

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the lights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to repair or disassemble the bulb, bulb base, electrical wiring, or subcomponents.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

537

When trouble arises

8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .......... 538
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in
an emergency ................. 539

8
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ......................... 540
If you think something is
wrong .............................. 545
Fuel pump shut off
system ............................ 546
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds ............................ 547
If a warning message is
displayed......................... 555
If you have a flat tire.......... 565
If the engine will not
start ................................. 580
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ...................... 582
If your vehicle overheats ... 585
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ............................... 588

538

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.

■ Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not
operating, the battery may discharge.

8-1. Essential information

539

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort
required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.


If the shift lever is shifted to N

3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4 Stop the engine.


If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle

speed as much as possible.
4 Stop the engine by turning the

engine switch to the “ACC”
position.

WARNING
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
● Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
● Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

When trouble arises

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

540

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle
towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service,
using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/
provincial and local laws.
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

541

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck


From the front

Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.



From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.

Using a flatbed truck
If your vehicle is transported by a
flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.

Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

When trouble arises

If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.

Front

542

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency
towing hooks. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for at most 50 miles (80 km) at under 18 mph (30km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
Emergency towing procedure
1 Securely attach cables or chains to the towing hooks.

Take care not to damage the vehicle body.


Type A



Type B

2 Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.

If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
3 4WD models: Put the front-wheel drive control switch in “2WD”.
4 Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.

When the shift lever cannot be shifted: (→P. 201)

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

543

WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
2WD models: Be sure to transport the
vehicle with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed with the
tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain
and related parts may be damaged or an
accident may occur due to a change in
direction of the vehicle.
4WD models: Be sure to transport the
vehicle with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed with the
tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain
or related parts may be damaged, the
vehicle may fly off the truck.

■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place
excessive stress on the towing hooks, cables or chains. The towing hooks,
cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people,
and cause serious damage.
● Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.

When trouble arises

544

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is in the
“LOCK” position or the key is removed.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

545

If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher
than normal.
● Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal
● Engine oil pressure gauge continually points lower than normal
● Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed
Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
8

When trouble arises

● Engine misses, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor

546

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or
when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off
system stops supply of fuel to the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
1 Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
2 Restart the engine.

NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

547

If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then
goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the
system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light

Warning light/Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

(Canada)

Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

When trouble arises

SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

548

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

(Canada)

Low fuel level warning light
 Standard fuel tank
Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 4.0 gal. (15.0 L,
3.3 Imp.gal.) or less
 Large fuel tank
Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 3.8 gal. (14.4 L,
3.2 lmp.gal.) or less
→ Refuel the vehicle.
Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*1
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their
seat belts
→ Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front
passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to
make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
→ P. 555

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Parking brake warning light (warning buzzer)*2
Indicates that the parking brake is engaged.
→ Release the parking brake.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

549

Warning light/Details/Actions

Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
• Natural causes (→P. 552)
• Flat tire (→P. 565)
→ Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case
the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation
pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.
→ Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• Trailer Sway Control system;
• The TRAC system;
• The hill-start assist control system; or
• The AUTO LSD system.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
The light will flash when any of the above systems other
than the hill-start assist control are operating.

When trouble arises

550

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details/Actions
PCS warning light (If equipped)
When the warning light flashes:
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
When the warning light illuminates:
Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to either of the following:
• An area around the radar sensor or camera sensor
being dirty or covered with condensation, ice, stickers,
etc.
→ Clear the dirt, condensation, ice, stickers, etc.
(→P. 226)
• Radar sensor or camera sensor operational conditions
(such as temperature, etc.) being not met
→ Driving is possible in this case. The PCS (Pre-Collision System) will be enabled if the operational conditions (such as temperature, etc.) are met again.
• Either the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system or PCS
(Pre-Collision System) is disabled or both are disabled.
→ To enable the PCS, enable both the VSC system and
PCS. (→P. 235, 304)

(Yellow)

LDA (Lane Departure Alert) indicator (If equipped)
The indicator comes on and a warning message is displayed to indicate that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
system is not available temporarily or has detected a malfunction.
→ P. 555

*1: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat
belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the “ON” or
“START” position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is
still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10
seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a
different tone for 20 more seconds.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

551

Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the
vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is sill unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 more seconds.

*2: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h) or more.

When trouble arises

■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact
sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s
seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light,
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat
belt pretensioners assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (→P. 40)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning
buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to
sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger,
and the warning light may not operate properly.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.

552

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure
warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after several minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The temporary spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the temporary
spare tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with the repaired tire and
adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off
after several minutes.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function
properly
→P. 501
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the engine switch is turned to “ON” position, have it checked
by your Toyota dealer.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an
audio sound.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

553

WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota
dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the
ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a
loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire
is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the
nearest Toyota dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
■ Maintenance of the tires

When trouble arises

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

554

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire
pressure warning system may not operate properly.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

555

If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm
and perform the following actions:
1 Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multiinformation display.

2 Multi-information display

If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions
have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning message and warning buzzer list
Warning message

Details/Actions

BRAKE!

Indicates that:
• There is a high possibility of a frontal collision;
or
• The pre-collision braking function is operating
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

(If equipped)

When trouble arises

Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in vehicle-tovehicle distance control
mode)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

556

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details/Actions

Indicates that the vehicle has deviated from the
lane (while the LDA [Lane Departure Alert] system is operating).
• The lane line on the side the vehicle has
deviated from flashes in Yellow.
• A buzzer also sounds.
→ Check around the vehicle and back to
inside of the lane lines.
(Yellow/
flashes)
(If equipped)

Engine Stopped
Shift Into P

Indicates that the engine was stopped with the
shift lever not in P.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Shift the shift lever to P.

(Flashes)

Engine Stopped
Stop In a Safe Place

Indicates that the engine was stopped while driving.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Stop the vehicle in a safe place such as the
shoulder of a road.

(Flashes)

Engine Coolant
Temp High
Stop in a Safe Place
See Owner’s Manual

CHECK
TRANSMISSION
SYSTEM

Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is
too high
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Toyota dealer.

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic transmission system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.

557

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message
Parking Assist
Malfunction

(If equipped)

Blind Spot Monitor
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking
assist
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.

Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.

(If equipped)

Indicates that one or more of the doors or the
hood is not fully closed
The system also indicates which doors are not
fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h),

flashes

and

buzzer

sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not
yet fully closed.
→ Make sure that all the doors and the hood
are closed.

High Transmission
Fluid Temp
See Owner’s Manual

Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h),

(U.S.A)

(Canada)

flashes

and

buzzer

sounds to indicate that the parking brake is
still engaged.
→ Release the parking brake.

When trouble arises

Release
Parking Brake

Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is to high
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, shift the shift lever to P and wait until
the light goes off.
If the light goes off, you may start the vehicle again. If the light does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer.

558

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message
Windshield
Washer Fluid
Low

Clean Parking Assist
Sensor

Details/Actions

Indicates that the washer fluid level is low
→ Add washer fluid.

Indicates that intuitive parking assist is dirty or
covered with ice
→ Clean the sensor.

(If equipped)

Blind Spot
Monitor
Unavailable

(If equipped)

Fuel Low

Maintenance
Required Soon
(U.S.A.)

Indicates that the Blind Spot Monitor sensors or
the surrounding area on the bumper is dirty or
covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Clean the sensor and its surrounding area
on the bumper.
 Standard fuel tank
Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 4.0 gal.
(15.0 L, 3.3 Imp.gal.) or less
 Large fuel tank
Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 3.8 gal.
(14.4 L, 3.2 lmp.gal.) or less
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Refuel the vehicle.

Indicates that all maintenance according to the
driven distance on the maintenance schedule*
should be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km)
after the message has been reset.
→ If necessary, perform maintenance.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Maintenance
Required
Visit Your Dealer
(U.S.A.)

Tire Pressure Warning System
Malfunction, Visit Your Dealer
(Flashes
and then
remains on)

Cruise Control
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Brake Override
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Details/Actions
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule*.
Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km)
after the message has been reset.
(The indicator will not work properly unless the
message has been reset.)
→ Perform the necessary maintenance.
Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (→P. 477)
Indicates a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.
The tire pressure warning light comes on after
flashing for 1 minute.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
• Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button
again to reactivate the system.
• A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the Brake Override
System.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.

Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals
are being depressed simultaneously, and the
Brake Override System is operating. (→P. 161)
→ Release the accelerator pedal and depress
the brake pedal.

When trouble arises

Accelerator and
Brake Pedals
Pressed
Simultaneously

559

560

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message
Pre-Collision System
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision
System).
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

(Flashes)
(If equipped)

LDA
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure Alert).
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

(Yellow)
(If equipped)

LDA
Unavailable
Below Approx.
32MPH
(If equipped)

LDA
Unavailable
at Current Speed
(If equipped)

SRS Airbag System
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Check Brake System

Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
system cannot be used as the vehicle speed is
lower than approximately 32 mph (50 km/h).
→ Drive the vehicle at approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
Indicates that LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system
cannot be used due to the vehicle speed being
too high.
→ Slow down.
Indicates a malfunction in the SRS airbag system.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Indicates the following:
• The brake fluid level is low; or
• The brake system is malfunctioning.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Toyota dealer.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message
Radar Cruise
Control
Unavailable
Clean Sensor

561

Details/Actions

Indicates that radar cruise control sensor is dirty
or covered with ice.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Clean the sensor.

(If equipped)

Radar Cruise
Control
Unavailable

(If equipped)

Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Unavailable

(If equipped)

Front Camera
Unavailable

(Yellow)
(If equipped)

Indicates that the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
sensors or the surrounding area on the bumper is
dirty or covered with ice (if equipped)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Clean the sensor and its surrounding area
on the bumper.
The operation conditions of the camera sensor
(temperature, etc.) are not met.
→ When the operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the
following systems will become available.
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system
• Dynamic radar cruise control
• Automatic High Beam
Indicates that dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow,
etc., are present on the windshield in front of the
camera sensor The following systems will be
temporarily unusable.
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system
• Dynamic radar cruise control
• Automatic High Beam
→ Tum the system off, remove any dirt, rain,
condensation, ice, snow, etc., from the
windshield, and then turn the system back
on.

When trouble arises

Front Camera
Unavailable
Remove Debris
On Windshield

Indicates that the dynamic radar cruise control
system cannot be used temporarily due to bad
weather
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Use the dynamic radar cruise control system when it becomes available again.

562

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message
Drive-Start
Control
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the Drive-start control.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.

Release
Accelerator

Indicates that the shift position was changed and
Drive-Start Control was operated while depressing the accelerator pedal.
→ Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.

Turn Lights Off

Indicates that the headlight switch is left on (with
the key removed and the driver’s door opened)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Turn the lights off.

(Flashes)

Headlight System
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Indicates a malfunction in:
• The automatic headlight leveling system; or
• The LED headlight system (if equipped).
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

Indicates a malfunction in the Automatic High
Beam system.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.

(If equipped)

Tire Pressure Low
Check Tire

Auto High Beam Ready
Turn ON High Beam to
Activate
(If equipped)

Indicates that the tire inflation pressure is low.
→ Check the tire inflation pressure, and
adjust to the appropriate level.
Indicates that the Automatic High Beam switch is
pressed while the headlights are in low beam.
→ Turn the high beam on and press the Automatic High Beam switch again.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message
VSC Turned Off
Pre-Collision Brake
System
Unavailable

563

Details/Actions

Indicates that, since the VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) system was turned off, the pre-collision
brake system operation is stopped.
→ Turn the VSC on. (→P. 304)

(If equipped)

Pre-Collision System
Unavailable

(If equipped)

Indicates that the pre-collision system is temporarily unavailable.
→ Please wait until the system returns. If the
message does not disappear, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Pre-Collision System
Unavailable
Clean Sensor

Indicates that the pre-collision system sensor is
dirty, covered with ice, etc.
→ Remove any dirt, ice, etc.

(If equipped)

Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer

Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear Cross
Traffic Alert).
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
8

Trailer Brake Error.

Contact dealer.

Indicates that the VSC ECU or G sensor is not
communicating with trailer brake control system.
Indicates a malfunction in the VSC system.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.

When trouble arises

If Towing,
Come to a Safe Stop
with Manual Controls.

564

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message
Trailer Brake Error.
If Towing,
Come to a Safe Stop
Contact dealer.

Trailer Wiring,
Type, or Connection
fault.
See Owner’s manual.

Details/Actions
Indicates that an internal switch failure of trailer
brake control system, an over current detected by
trailer brake control system.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Indicates that an internal microprocessor error,
output circuit to trailer brakes unintended current,
or manual brake output slider is stuck or broken
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Indicates that the output circuit has reverse voltage, or the internal trailer brake control system
temperature is too high.
→ Check trailer wiring issue, check trailer
connection. If there is still a problem, have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.

*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function

properly
→P. 501

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

565

If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: →P. 495
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P. 538)

When trouble arises

566

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
■ Spare tire

■ Jack and tools

1 Jack
2 Tool bag


Double Cab models without
storage box



CrewMax models



Double Cab models with storage box

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

567

WARNING
■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack.
● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the
vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
■ Using the jack handle
Insert the square head securely until you hear a click to prevent the
extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
8

When trouble arises

568

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack and tool bag (Double Cab models)
1 Pull up the lever and raise the

bottom cushion up.

2 On vehicles with storage box,

turn the knob to the “OPEN”
direction and remove the lid.

3 On vehicles with storage box,

remove the jack cover panel.

4 Unhook the rubber band and

take out the jack.
1 For loosening
2 For tightening

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

569

5 Unhook the rubber band and

remove the tool bag.

Taking out the jack and tool bag (CrewMax models)
1 Pull the lever and raise the bot-

tom cushion up.

2 Unhook the rubber band and

take out the jack.
1 For loosening
2 For tightening

3 Unhook the rubber band and
When trouble arises

remove the tool bag.

570

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire
1 Assemble

the jack
extension as shown.

handle

2 Insert the end of the jack han-

dle extension into the lowering
screw and turn it counterclockwise.

3 After the tire is lowered com-

pletely to the ground, remove
the holding bracket.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

571

Replacing a flat tire
1 Chock the tires.

Flat tire
Front

Rear

Wheel chock positions

Left-hand side

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Left-hand side

In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side

In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 On some models, remove the

wheel ornament using the
wheel nut wrench as shown.
To protect the wheel and wheel
ornament, place a rag between
the wrench and the wheel ornament, as shown in the illustration.

3 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

When trouble arises

572

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4 Assemble

the jack
extension as shown.

handle

5 Position the jack at the correct

jack point as shown.
1 Front
2 Rear

Make sure the jack is positioned
on a level and solid place.

6 Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.
When positioning the jack under
the rear axle housing, make sure
the groove on the top of the jack
fits with the rear axle housing.

7 Remove all the wheel nuts and

the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.

Front

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

573

WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
• Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it
from under the vehicle.
• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area
around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with
hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc., may
result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Steel wheel: 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)
Aluminum wheel: 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.
• Retighten the wheel nuts within 100 miles (160 km) of driving.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off
the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (→P. 511)
8

When trouble arises

574

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire
1 Remove any dirt or foreign mat-

ter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, causing the tire to come
off.
2 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by

approximately the same amount.
Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.


Replacing a steel wheel with a
steel wheel
Tapered portion

Disc wheel



Replacing an aluminum wheel
with a steel wheel
Tapered portion

Disc wheel

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

575

3 Lower the vehicle.

4 Firmly tighten each nut two or

three times in the order shown
in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

WARNING
■ Stowing the flat tire

Failure to follow steps listed under stowing the tire may result in damage
to the spare tire carrier and loss of the tire, which could result in serious
injury or death.

When trouble arises

576

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools
1 Vehicles with aluminum wheels: Remove the center wheel orna-

ment by pushing from the reverse side.
2 Lay down the tire with the valve

stem facing up and install the
holding bracket, inserting the
claw into the wheel lug nut hole.
Turn the jack handle extension
clockwise to take up slack in
the chain.
Then, check to ensure the claw is
in the wheel lug nut hole and the
holding bracket is centered in the
wheel hub.
1 Holding bracket

incorrect

2 Claw

While raising, secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight
up without catching on any surrounding part, to prevent it from
flying forward during a collision or
sudden braking.
Tightening torque:
34.7 ft·lbf (46.6 N·m, 4.8 kgf·m)

correct

577

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

3 Confirm it is not loose after

tightening:
1 Push and pull the tire
2 Try rotating

Visually check to ensure tire is
not hung on surrounding parts.

If looseness or misassembly exists, repeat step

and step

4 Repeat step 3 , any time the tire is lowered or disturbed.
5 Stow the tools and jack securely.

■ The temporary spare tire
● The temporary spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the disc wheel.
Use the temporary spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the temporary spare
tire. (→P. 607)
■ When reinstalling the wheel ornament (on some models)
→P. 511
■ When using the temporary spare tire
As the temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the
temporary spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the temporary spare tire on one of the front wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires:
Replace a front tire with the temporary spare tire.

Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the
vehicle.

Fit tire chains to the rear tires.

When trouble arises

578

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING
■ When using the temporary spare tire
● Remember that the temporary spare tire provided is specifically

designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your temporary spare
tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use more than one temporary spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the temporary spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
■ When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
•
•
•
•
•

ABS & Brake assist
VSC
TRAC
AUTO LSD
Pre-Collision System*

•
•
•
•
•

Automatic High Beam*
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)*
Dynamic radar cruise control*
Cruise control*
Navigation system*

*: If equipped
Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may
even negatively affect the drive-train components:
• 4WD system
■ Speed limit when using the temporary spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a temporary
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or
serious injury.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

579

NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■ Driving with tire chains and the temporary spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the temporary spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 496)

When trouble arises

580

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed (→P. 195), consider each of the following points.
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
Flex-fuel vehicles: The type of fuel may be different. When refueling, add the same type of fuel, if available.
After adding a different type of fuel, the engine may run roughly and
driving performance may be reduced for a while when the engine is
first started. In this case, wait until the engine runs normally.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(→P. 195)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(→P. 76)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low
volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 582)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

581

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 582)
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair
procedures are unknown.

When trouble arises

582

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the
vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the
steps below.
1 Confirm that the key and wire-

less
remote
control
(if
equipped) are being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or
booster) cables, depending on the
situation, the alarm may activate
and the doors may lock. (→P. 87)

2 Open the hood. (→P. 484)
3 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

1 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery

terminal on your vehicle.
2 Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the

positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

583

3 Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi-

nal on the second vehicle.
4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a

solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
4 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed

slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your vehicle.
5 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the

engine of your vehicle.
6 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in

the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.

When trouble arises

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running
at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ When the battery is removed or discharged
The moon roof must be initialized. (→P. 156)
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)

584

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fan or belt.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

585

If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 95)
enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For
example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
● “ENGINE COOLANT OVERTEMP” is shown on the multi-information display.
● Steam comes out from under the hood.
Correction procedures
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning sys-

tem, and then stop the engine.
2 If you see steam:

Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the engine has cooled

down sufficiently, inspect the
hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
1 Radiator
2 Cooling fan
8

When trouble arises

If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.

586

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4 The coolant level is satisfactory

if it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” lines on the reservoir.
1 Reservoir
2 “FULL”
3 “LOW”
4 Radiator cap
5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

6 Start the engine to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and

to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
7 If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

587

WARNING
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fans, etc., while the engine is running.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust,
etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additives.

When trouble arises

588

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
1 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction

under the rear wheels.
4 Restart the engine.
5 Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then,

while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Press

to turn off TRAC.

Turn off TRAC and/or VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to
free the vehicle. (→P. 302, 304)
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the
surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

589

NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
● When a warning message for the automatic transmission fluid temperature
is displayed while attempting to free a stuck vehicle, immediately remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal and wait until the warning message
disappears. Otherwise, the transmission may become damaged.
(→P. 555)

When trouble arises

590

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

591

Vehicle specifications

9
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .......... 592
Fuel information ................ 610
Tire information ................. 614
9-2. Customization
Customizable features ...... 624
9-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize ............... 632

592

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions


2WD models

Cab type

Double Cab

Bed type
Overall length

CrewMax

Standard

Long

Short

228.9 in. (5815
mm)

247.8 in.
(6295 mm)

228.9 in.
(5815 mm)

Overall width

79.9 in. (2030 mm)
75.9 in.
(1930 mm)*2

75.7 in.
(1925 mm)*2

75.7 in.
(1925mm)*3,*4

75.5 in.
(1920mm)*3,*4

Overall
height*1

Wheelbase

145.6 in. (3700
mm)

164.5 in.
(4180 mm)

Front tread

67.9 in. (1725 mm)

Rear tread

67.9 in. (1725 mm)

*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: P255/70R18 tires
*3: P275/65R18 tires
*4: P275/55R20 tires

145.6 in.
(3700 mm)

9-1. Specifications


593

4WD models

Cab type

Double Cab

Bed type
Overall length

Standard

Long

Short

228.9 in. (5815
mm)

247.8 in.
(6295 mm)

228.9 in.
(5815 mm)

Overall width
Overall
height*1

Wheelbase

CrewMax

79.9 in. (2030 mm)
76.3 in.
(1940 mm)*2

76.1 in.
(1935 mm)*2

76.1 in.
(1935mm)*3,*4

75.9 in.
(1930mm)*3,*4

145.6 in. (3700
mm)

164.5 in.
(4180 mm)

Front tread

67.9 in. (1725 mm)

Rear tread

67.9 in. (1725 mm)

145.6 in.
(3700 mm)

*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: P255/70R18 tires
*3: P275/65R18 tires
*4: P275/55R20 tires

Vehicle specifications

594

9-1. Specifications

Vehicle capacity weight


Double Cab models

Model code*

UPK51LCRTSKA
UPK56LCRTSKA

Engine

Driving
system

Bed type

Vehicle capacity
weight
(Occupants + luggage)
1435 lb. (650 kg)

2WD

1485 lb. (675 kg)*2

1UR-FE
engine

1330 lb. (605 kg)

4WD

1380 lb. (625 kg)*2
1605 lb. (730 kg)

USK51LCRTSKA

1540 lb. (700 kg)*3
1425 lb. (645 kg)*4

3UR-FE
engine
Standard

USK51LCRTLKA

1570 lb. (710 kg)
1505 lb. (680 kg)*3
1385 lb. (630 kg)*4
1605 lb. (730 kg)

USK51LCRTSGA

1540 lb. (700 kg)*3
3UR-FBE
engine

1425 lb. (645 kg)*4

2WD

1570 lb. (710 kg)

USK51LCRTLGA

1505 lb. (680 kg)*3
1385 lb. (630 kg)*4
1580 lb. (715 kg)

USK52LCHTSKA

3UR-FE
engine

1515 lb. (685 kg)*3
Long

USK52LCHTSGA

3UR-FBE
engine

1395 lb. (635 kg)*4
1580 lb. (715 kg)
1515 lb. (685 kg)*3
1395 lb. (635 kg)*4

9-1. Specifications

Model code*

Engine

Driving
system

Bed type

595

Vehicle capacity
weight
(Occupants + luggage)
1500 lb. (680 kg)

USK56LCRTSKA

1435 lb. (650 kg)*3
Standard

USK56LCRTLKA

3UR-FE
engine

1320 lb. (600 kg)*4
1485 lb. (675 kg)
1420 lb. (645 kg)*3
1300 lb. (590 kg)*4
1475 lb. (670 kg)

USK57LCHTSKA

Long

1290 lb. (585 kg)*4

4WD

1500 lb. (680 kg)

USK56LCRTSGA

1435 lb. (650 kg)*3
Standard

USK56LCRTLGA

1410 lb. (640 kg)*3

3UR-FBE
engine

1320 lb. (600 kg)*4
1485 lb. (675 kg)
1420 lb. (645 kg)*3
1300 lb. (590 kg)*4
1475 lb. (670 kg)

USK57LCHTSGA

Long

1410 lb. (640 kg)*3
1290 lb. (585 kg)*4

Vehicle specifications

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 600)
*2: Vehicles with towing package (hitch only)
*3: Vehicles with towing package
*4: Vehicles with towing package and large fuel tank

596


9-1. Specifications

CrewMax models

Model code*

Engine

Driving
system

Bed type

Vehicle capacity
weight
(Occupants + luggage)
1440 lb. (655 kg)

UPK51LPSTSKA

1405 lb. (635 kg)*2

2WD

1390 lb. (630 kg)*3
1355 lb. (615 kg)*6

1UR-FE
engine
UPK56LPSTSKA

1330 lb. (605 kg)
1295 lb. (590 kg)*2

4WD

1280 lb. (580 kg)*3
1245 lb. (565 kg)*6
1545 lb. (700 kg)
1510 lb. (685 kg)*2
1480 lb. (670 kg)*4

USK51LPSTSKA

1360 lb. (615 kg)*5
Short

1445 lb. (655 kg)*7
1325 lb. (600 kg)*8
1510 lb. (685 kg)
1475 lb. (670 kg)*2

USK51LPSTLKA

3UR-FE
engine

2WD

1445 lb. (655 kg)*4
1330 lb. (600 kg)*5
1410 lb. (640 kg)*7
1295 lb. (585 kg)*8
1500 lb. (680 kg)
1465 lb. (665 kg)*2

USK51LPSTZKA

1435 lb. (650 kg)*4
1315 lb. (595 kg)*5
1400 lb. (635 kg)*7
1280 lb. (580 kg)*8

9-1. Specifications

Model code*1

Engine

Driving
system

Bed type

597

Vehicle capacity
weight
(Occupants + luggage)
1545 lb. (700 kg)
1510 lb. (685 kg)*2
1480 lb. (670 kg)*4

USK51LPSTSGA

1360 lb. (615 kg)*5
1445 lb. (655 kg)*7
1325 lb. (600 kg)*8
1510 lb. (685 kg)
1475 lb. (670 kg)*2

USK51LPSTLGA

3UR-FBE
engine

2WD

Short

1445 lb. (655 kg)*4
1330 lb. (600 kg)*5
1410 lb. (640 kg)*7
1295 lb. (585 kg)*8
1500 lb. (680 kg)
1465 lb. (665 kg)*2

USK51LPSTZGA

1435 lb. (650 kg)*4
1315 lb. (595 kg)*5
1400 lb. (635 kg)*7
1280 lb. (580 kg)*8

Vehicle specifications

598

9-1. Specifications

Model code*1

Engine

Driving
system

Bed type

Vehicle capacity
weight
(Occupants + luggage)
1450 lb. (660 kg)
1415 lb. (640 kg)*2
1385 lb. (630 kg)*4

USK56LPSTSKA

1265 lb. (575 kg)*5
1350 lb. (610 kg)*7
1230 lb. (560 kg)*8
1400 lb. (635 kg)
1365 lb. (620 kg)*2

USK56LPSTLKA

3UR-FE
engine

4WD

Short

1335 lb. (605 kg)*4
1220 lb. (555 kg)*5
1300 lb. (590 kg)*7
1185 lb. (535 kg)*8
1405 lb. (635 kg)
1370 lb. (620 kg)*2

USK56LPSTZKA

1340 lb. (610 kg)*4
1220 lb. (555 kg)*5
1305 lb. (590 kg)*7
1185 lb. (540 kg)*8

9-1. Specifications

Model code*1

Engine

Driving
system

Bed type

599

Vehicle capacity
weight
(Occupants + luggage)
1450 lb. (660 kg)
1415 lb. (640 kg)*2
1385 lb. (630 kg)*4

USK56LPSTSGA

1265 lb. (575 kg)*5
1350 lb. (610 kg)*7
1230 lb. (560 kg)*8
1400 lb. (635 kg)
1365 lb. (620 kg)*2

USK56LPSTLGA

3UR-FBE
engine

4WD

Short

1335 lb. (605 kg)*4
1220 lb. (555 kg)*5
1300 lb. (590 kg)*7
1185 lb. (535 kg)*8
1405 lb. (635 kg)
1370 lb. (620 kg)*2

USK56LPSTZGA

1340 lb. (610 kg)*4
1220 lb. (555 kg)*5
1305 lb. (590 kg)*7
1185 lb. (540 kg)*8

Vehicle specifications

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 600)
*2: Vehicles with electric moon roof
*3: Vehicles with towing package (hitch only)
*4: Vehicles with towing package
*5: Vehicles with towing package and large fuel tank
*6: Vehicles with towing package (hitch only) and electric moon roof
*7: Vehicles with towing package and electric moon roof
*8: Vehicles with towing package, electric moon roof and large fuel tank

600

9-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.


1UR-FE engine



3UR-FE
engines

and

3UR-FBE

9-1. Specifications

601

Engine
Model

1UR-FE, 3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE

Type

8-cylinder V-type, 4-cycle, gasoline
 1UR-FE engine

3.70 × 3.27 in. (94.0 × 83.0 mm)

Bore and stroke

 3UR-FE and 3UR-FBE engines

3.70 × 4.02 in. (94.0 × 102.0 mm)
 1UR-FE engine

281.2 cu.in. (4608 cm3)
 3UR-FE and 3UR-FBE engines
345.6 cu.in. (5663 cm3)

Displacement

Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment

Valve clearance
(engine cold)

Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Engine

Model

1UR-FE and 3UR-FE
engines

3UR-FBE engine

Type

Gasoline engine

Flex-fuel engine

Unleaded gasoline only

Unleaded gasoline,
E85, or a blend of the
two fuels

Fuel type
Octane rating
(Unleaded gasoline)
Ethanol percentage
(E85)
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
—

85% or less
9

Vehicle specifications

Standard fuel tank:
26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 Imp.gal.)
Large fuel tank:
38.0 gal. (144.0 L, 31.7 Imp.gal.)

602

9-1. Specifications

Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill - reference*)
With filter
Without filter

8.5 qt. (8.0 L, 7.0 Imp.qt.)
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.

Outside temperature

9-1. Specifications

603

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting
of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark
is added to some oil containers
to help you select the oil you
should use.

Vehicle specifications

604

9-1. Specifications

Cooling system
 Vehicles without towing package

1UR-FE
engine

11.4 qt. (10.8 L, 9.5 Imp.qt.)
 Vehicles with towing package

12.6 qt. (11.9 L, 10.5 Imp.qt.)

Capacity

 Vehicles without towing package

3UR-FE,
3UR-FBE
engines

11.4 qt. (10.8 L, 9.5 Imp.qt.)
 Vehicles with towing package

12.4 qt. (11.7 L, 10.3 Imp.qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, nonnitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system
Spark plug
Make

DENSO SK20HR11

Gap

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

9-1. Specifications

605

Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at 68°F 12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
(20°C):
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine
and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates

5 A max.

Differential
Front (4WD models)
1UR-FE engine

2.2 qt. (2.05 L, 1.8 Imp.qt.)
4.9 qt. (4.60 L, 4.0 Imp.qt.)
 With standard bed

Double Cab
models
Oil
capacity Rear 3UR-FE
and
3UR-FBE
engines
CrewMax
models

3.8 qt. (3.60 L, 3.2 Imp.qt.)
 With long bed

4.0 qt. (3.75 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)
 2WD models

4.0 qt. (3.75 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)
 4WD models

3.8 qt. (3.60 L, 3.2 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Differential
Gear Oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or
equivalent

*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at
the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or
an equivalent oil of matching quality to satisfy the above specification.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
9

Vehicle specifications

606

9-1. Specifications

Automatic transmission
 2WD models

11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp.qt.)

1UR-FE engine
Fluid
capacity*

 4WD models

11.3 qt. (10.7 L, 9.4 Imp.qt.)
3UR-FE
and
3UR-FBE
engines

Vehicles without
11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp.qt.)
towing package
Vehicles
with
12.3 qt. (11.6 L, 10.2 Imp.qt.)
towing package

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by
vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s transmission.

Transfer (4WD models)
Oil capacity

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Oil type

Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF or
equivalent

Recommended oil viscosity

SAE 75W

9-1. Specifications

607

Brakes
Pedal clearance*1

4.1 in. (104 mm) Min.

Pedal free play

0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel*2

6 — 9 clicks

Fluid type

FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,
50 kgf) with the engine running.

Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.1 lbf (300
N, 30.6 kgf).

Steering
Free play

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III

Tires and wheels


Type A

Tire size

P255/70R18 112T

Front tires:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Tire inflation pressure
Rear tires:
(Recommended cold
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
tire inflation pressure)
Spare tire:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
18 × 8J

Wheel nut torque

Steel wheels:
154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

Vehicle specifications

Wheel size

608


9-1. Specifications

Type B

Tire size

P275/65R18 114T

18 × 8J

Wheel nut torque

Steel wheels:
154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)



Type C

Tire size

P275/55R20 111H,
P255/70R18 112T (spare tire)

20 × 8J,
18 × 8J (spare wheel)

Wheel nut torque

Steel wheels:
154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

609

9-1. Specifications

Light bulbs
Light Bulbs

Bulb No.

Type

HB2

60/55

H16

W5W

4157NAK

27/8

7444NA

921

3157KX

27/8

Back-up lights

7440

License plate lights

W5W

921

—

Vanity lights

7065

Personal/interior lights
Front
Rear

W5W
W5W

5
5

D
D

—

1.4

Headlights*

Front fog
type)*1

lights

(bulb

Front side marker lights
Front turn signal lights/
parking lights*2
Front turn signal lights*3
Exterior

Rear turn signal lights
Stop/tail and
marker lights

rear

side

High mounted stoplight and
cargo lamp
Outer foot light

Interior

Foot well lighting

*1: If equipped
*2: Vehicles with bulb type headlights
*3: Vehicles with LED type headlights

A: HB2 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Double end bulbs

Vehicle specifications

B: H16 halogen bulbs

610

9-1. Specifications

Fuel information


Gasoline engine (→P. 601)

You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87
may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to
engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.


Flex-fuel engine (→P. 601)

You must only use unleaded gasoline, E85, or a blend of the two
fuels.
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number
91] or higher), E85, or a blend of two fuels is required for optimum engine performance.
The use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than
87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead
to engine damage.
The use of fuel with an ethanol concentration in excess of 85%
will have a negative impact on driving performance and can
cause damage to the fuel system components.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.
At minimum, the E85 you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D5798 in the U.S.A.
■ Identifying flex-fuel vehicles
Flex-fuel vehicles can be identified by the
fuel tank cap, which is marked “FLEXFUEL E85/GASOLINE”.

9-1. Specifications

611

Vehicle specifications

■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed
a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC),
which is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ E85 fuel (Flex-fuel vehicles)
● E85 fuel is a blend of 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline. However, E85 does
not necessarily contain 85% ethanol. For example, in cold climates the ethanol content of E85 may be reduced during the winter months to maintain
cold weather starting performance.
● E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will need to fill your
fuel tank more frequently when using E85.
● The number of fuel stations that sell E85 fuel is limited. For more information
about fueling stations, please refer to the U.S. Department of Energy Web
site.
http://www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to
clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For
more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers,
please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as
reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically
acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced
vehicle emissions.

612

9-1. Specifications

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline (gasoline engine)
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled
E30, E50, E85 (which are only some
examples of fuel containing more than
15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this
happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of after-market fuel additives (Flex-fuel
vehicles)
Do not use any after-market fuel additives when repeatedly refueling with
E85, as some after-market fuel additives are not compatible with E85.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

9-1. Specifications

613

NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Gasoline engine: Do not use gasohol other than the type previously
stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ When use of non-specified fuels (Flex-fuel engine)
The use of non-specified fuels will have a negative impact on starting and
driving performance, and will cause damage to the fuel system components. Therefore, do not add fuels such as the following.
● Fuels containing methanol
● Fuels with more than 85% ethanol
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is
encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

Vehicle specifications

614

9-1. Specifications

Tire information
Typical tire symbols

1 Tire size

(→P. 615)

2 DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(→P. 615)

3 Location of treadwear indicators

(→P. 495)

4 Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
5 Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
6 Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(→P. 619)

7 Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(→P. 619)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
8 TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire.
A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
9 Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL”
is a bias-ply tire.
10 Summer tire or all season tire

(→P. 500)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S”
is a summer tire.

9-1. Specifications

615

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)


Type A



Type B

1 DOT symbol*
2 Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3 Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
4 Tire size code
5 Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
6 Manufacturing week
7 Manufacturing year
8 Manufacturer’s code

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Tire size
■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
1 Tire use

2 Section width (millimeters)
3 Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)
4 Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
5 Wheel diameter (inches)

Vehicle specifications

(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)

616

9-1. Specifications

6 Load index

(2 digits or 3 digits)
7 Speed symbol

(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions

1 Section width
2 Tire height
3 Wheel diameter

Tire section names
1 Bead
2 Sidewall
3 Shoulder
4 Tread
5 Belt
6 Inner liner
7 Reinforcing rubber
8 Carcass
9 Rim lines
10 Bead wires
11 Chafer

9-1. Specifications

617

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.

Vehicle specifications

618

9-1. Specifications

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.

9-1. Specifications

619

Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
Cold tire inflation pres- parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
sure
that condition
Maximum
pressure

inflation

Recommended
tion pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which
a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall
of the tire

infla- Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine

The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehi(b) Accessory weight
cle weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal
weight

occupant

Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
options
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy
duty battery, and special trim

Vehicle specifications

Production
weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1*
that follows

620

9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated

Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a
rim by style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle
capacity The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
weight
(Total
load (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity)
capacity
The load on an individual tire that is deterVehicle maximum load mined by distributing to each axle its share of
the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and
on the tire
dividing by two
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of
Vehicle normal load on
curb weight, accessory weight, and normal
the tire
occupant weight (distributed in accordance
with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side

The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate
angles substantially less than 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread

Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall

Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire

9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

621

Meaning

Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber
compounds

Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and
the tire is designed to fit on the underside of
the rim in a manner that encloses the rim
flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire

Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass

Intended
sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
outboard
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
inflation pressure
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements

Vehicle specifications

Light truck (LT) tire

622

9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall,
or innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks,
that have a gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead

Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall

9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

623

Meaning

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and
which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
)
on at least one sidewall

Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire

Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road

Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators
(TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing

*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants

Occupant distribution
in a normally loaded
vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second
seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat

16 through 20

2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat

Vehicle specifications

Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants

624

9-2. Customization

Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be
personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by
your Toyota dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
■ Changing by using the multimedia system
1 Press the “SETUP” or “APPS” button.


Entune Audio



Entune Premium Audio



Entune Audio Plus

2 Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio:

Select “Setup” on the “Apps” screen.
3 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
4 Select “Vehicle Customization” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.

“Vehicle Customization” screen will appear.
5 Choose a category displayed on the screen to display the set-

tings.

9-2. Customization

625

6 Select the setting to be changed. Change each setting.

For items that can be enabled/disabled, and for items with an
operating time that can be changed, select “On” or “Off”, or select
the desired operating time.
For items with sensor sensitivity that can be changed, select “+”
or “-” to choose the desired level, then select “OK”.
7 A message indicating that the settings are being saved will

appear. Do not perform any other operations while this message
is displayed.
■ Changing by using the multi-information display

→P. 100
Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
1 Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display.
2 Settings that can be changed using the multimedia system.
3 Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer.

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

Vehicle specifications

626

9-2. Customization

■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (→P. 95, 100)
Function*1
Language*2

Units*2

Default setting
English

miles
(MPG USA)

Customized
setting

Desired status
screen*3

—

OFF

—

French
Spanish
miles
(MPG
Imperial)
km (km/L)
km (L/100 km)

Switch settings

Drive information 1

Drive information 2

Pop-up display

Drive
information 1
Average Fuel
Economy
Current Fuel
Economy
Distance after
Start
Travel Time
after Start
ON

Green
Color

Blue

Orange
Yellow

*1: For details about each function: →P. 102
*2: The default setting varies according to country.
*3: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on multi-information
display).

: Following items: current fuel economy (bar type), average fuel economy
(total average, trip average or tank average), average speed (average
speed or trip average speed), elapsed time (total time or trip time), distance (range or trip distance), other (blank).

627

9-2. Customization

■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)* (→P. 244)
Default setting

Customized
setting

LDA sensitivity

1 (Standard)

2 (High)

—

Sway warning

OFF

—

Function

Sway warning sensitivity

2 (Standard)

1 (Low)
3 (High)

*: If equipped
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)* (→P. 231)
Function
PCS
PCS sensitivity

Default setting

Customized
setting

OFF

—

2 (Middle)

1 (Near)
3 (Far)

*: If equipped
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)* (→P. 286)
Function
BSM
BSM brightness
RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
RCTA volume

Customized
setting

OFF

—

Bright

Dim

—

OFF

—

1
3

Vehicle specifications

*: If equipped

Default setting

628

9-2. Customization

■ Trailer brake controller* (→P. 308)
Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

—

Electric
5000+ lb
Electric
0-4999lb

TBC trailer type

E-O-H
0-4999lb
E-O-H
5000+ lb
TBC OFF

*: If equipped
■ Door lock* (→P. 114)
Default setting

Customized
setting

Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps

All doors
unlocked in
one step

—

Speed-detecting
automatic door lock function

Off

—

Shifting gears to position
other than P locks all
doors

Off

—

Shifting gears
unlocks all doors

Off

—

Off

—

Function

Unlocking using a key

Opening the driver’s door
unlocks all doors

*: If equipped

629

9-2. Customization

■ Wireless remote control* (→P. 114)
Function
Wireless remote control

Unlocking operation

Automatic door lock function to be activated if door
is not opened after being
unlocked
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened
after
being
unlocked

Default setting

Customized
setting

Off

—

Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps

All doors
unlocked in
one step

—

Off

—

0 seconds
60 seconds

30 seconds
120 seconds

Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)

Off

—

Operation signal
(Buzzer)

Off

—

Panic function

Off

—

Open
door
reminder
buzzer (When locking the
vehicle)

Off

—

*: If equipped
9

Vehicle specifications

630

9-2. Customization

■ Moon roof * (→P. 154)
Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

—

Tilt only

—

Default setting

Customized
setting

Level 3

Level 1 to 5

—

Open only
Door key linked operation

Open and close

Close only
Off

Linked operation of components when door key is
used

Slide only

*: If equipped
■ Automatic light off system* (→P. 206)
Function
Light sensor sensitivity
Time
elapsed
before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed

0 seconds
30 seconds

60 seconds
90 seconds

*: If equipped
■ Illumination (→P. 429)
Customized
setting

Function

Default setting

Time elapsed before lights
turn off

15 seconds

Operation after the engine
is off

Off

—

Operation when the doors
are unlocked

Off

—

7.5 seconds
30 seconds

631

9-2. Customization

■ Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer (→P. 548)
Function

Default setting

Customized
setting

Vehicle speed linked seat
belt reminder buzzer

Off

—

■ Vehicle customization
● When the speed-detecting automatic door lock function and shift position
linked door locking function (shifting gears to a position other than P locks
all doors) are both on, the door lock operates as follows.
• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will
be locked.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed-detecting automatic door lock function would not operate.
• If the vehicle is started with any the door unlocked, the speed-detecting
automatic door lock function will operate.
● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the automatic
door lock function (Time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is
activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked) activates, the signals
will be generated in accordance with operation signal (buzzers) and the
operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.
WARNING
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may
collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or serious health hazard.
NOTICE

Vehicle specifications

■ During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

632

9-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:
Item

When to initialize

Reference

• After reconnecting or changing the battery
• After changing a fuse

P. 156

Message indicating mainte- • After the maintenance is pernance is required
formed

P. 477

Tire pressure warning sys- • When rotating the tires.
tem
• When changing the tire size.

P. 497

Moon roof

633

For owners

10
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................ 634
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................... 635
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) .............................. 637
Camper information ................... 646

634

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

635

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
(in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité
● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière
jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre
entièrement l’épaule; elle ne
doit cependant pas toucher le
cou ni glisser de l’épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale de
la ceinture de sécurité le plus
bas possible sur les hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier du
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calezvous bien dans le siège.
● Ne pas vriller la ceinture de
sécurité.
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d’eau savonneuse tiède. Par ailleurs, vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures
ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.

For owners

636
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu’elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. Ne pas utiliser une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu’elle ne
soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n’apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l’occupant contre des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.

637

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

For owners

638

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
1 Coussins gonflables SRS conducteur/passager avant

Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de l’habitacle
2 Coussins gonflables SRS de genoux

Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau
3 Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux

Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants des
sièges avant
4 Coussins gonflables SRS rideau

● Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants assis dans les sièges des places extérieures
● Participent à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule
en cas de retournement de celui-ci

639
Composition du système de coussins gonflables SRS

1 Prétensionneurs de ceintures

conducteur

de sécurité
2 Coussins

10 Capteur de position du siège

11 Capteurs

3 Témoins

indicateurs “AIR
BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”

12 Capteurs

4 Coussin gonflable passager

13 Contacteur de boucle de cein-

gonflables

genoux

avant
5 Coussins gonflables rideau
6 Coussins gonflables latéraux

(sièges avant)
7 Système

de classification
d’occupant du siège passager
avant (ECU et capteurs)

d’impact

latéral

d’impact
(porte avant)

latéral

(arrière)

ture de sécurité conducteur
14 Contacteur de boucle de cein-

ture de
avant

sécurité

passager

15 Capteurs d’impact avant
16 Boîtier électronique de couss-

ins gonflables

8 Témoin d’alerte SRS
For owners

9 Coussin gonflable conducteur

640
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS,
dont la conception est basée sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules
automobiles américains (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique de
coussins gonflables (ECU) utilise les informations reçues des capteurs, etc. détaillés dans le schéma ci-dessus de composition du système pour commander le déploiement des coussins gonflables. Ces
informations comprennent des informations sur la gravité de la collision et les occupants. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables
est obtenu au moyen d’une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs
pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d’amortir le
mouvement des occupants.
Siège avant de type banquette: Les coussins gonflables SRS sont
conçus pour protéger le conducteur et le passager avant droit, et en
aucun cas une personne assise à la place centrale avant.

641
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables
SRS.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une puissance considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable.
Conseils de la National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA):
Sachant que la zone de danger pour le coussin gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) du déploiement, placezvous à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable conducteur pour garantir une
marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le
moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de
10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin
ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est
équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela
vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que
vers la tête et le cou.
Le siège doit être réglé selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue des
commandes au tableau de bord.
10

For owners

642
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles des ceintures de sièges avant, mais pas au
pêne de la ceinture de sécurité proprement dite, les coussins gonflables SRS
frontaux déterminent que le conducteur
et le passager avant portent leur ceinture de sécurité, alors même qu’elle
n’est pas attachée. Dans ce cas, les
coussins gonflables SRS frontaux risquent de ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, causant des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité
avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une
puissance considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du
coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin
possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce
que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.
● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures
graves, voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal
attachés. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes
pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota recommande vivement
que tous les nourrissons et enfants soient installés dans les sièges arrière
du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs
pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant.
● Ne pas s’asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s’appuyer contre la planche de
bord.

643
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne laissez pas un enfant debout face
au coussin gonflable SRS passager
avant ni assis sur les genoux d’un passager avant.
● Ne pas laisser les occupants des sièges
avant voyager avec un objet sur les
genoux.
● Ne pas s’appuyer contre la porte, contre
le rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants avant, latéraux et arrière.

● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face
à la portière sur les sièges du passager
ou sortir la tête ou les mains à
l’extérieur du véhicule.

● Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord, la garniture centrale
du volant de direction et la partie
inférieure du tableau de bord.
Lors du déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS conducteur, passager
avant et de genoux, tout objet risque de
se transformer en projectile.
● Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de
pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux
montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral
de toit et à la poignée de maintien.

For owners

644
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne pas attacher à la clé des objets
lourds, pointus ou très durs, comme
d’autres clés par exemple. Ces objets
risquent d’entraver le déploiement du
coussin gonflable SRS de genoux ou
d’être projetés en direction du siège
conducteur par la force de déploiement,
constituant ainsi un danger potentiel.
● Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet
dur. En cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS rideau, tous ces
objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
● Si une housse en vinyle recouvre la partie où le coussins gonflable SRS
de genoux se déploie, veillez à l’enlever.
● N’utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d’en
gêner le déploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins
gonflables latéraux de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le dispositif ou
entraîner le déploiement accidentel des coussins latéraux, entraînant la
mort ou des blessures graves.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones
renfermant les composants des coussins gonflables SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins
gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air
frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger.
Retirez tout résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations
de la peau.

645
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
● Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture centrale du volant de direction et les garnitures de montants avant et
arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par
votre concessionnaire Toyota.
● Ne placez aucun objet, par exemple un coussin, sur le siège du passager
avant. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute
la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter normalement
le poids du passager. En conséquence, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux du passager avant peuvent ne pas se déployer en cas de collision.
■ Modification et élimination en fin de vie des éléments du système de
coussins gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez
besoin d’intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l’une des modifications suivantes. Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner
correctement ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des coussins gonflables
SRS
● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
● Réparation ou modification des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des
flancs de l’habitacle
● Installation d’un équipement de protection sur la calandre (pare-buffle,
pare-kangourou, etc.), d’un chasse-neige, de treuils ou d’une galerie de
toit
● Modification des suspensions du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques, tels qu’un émetteur/récepteur radio
ou lecteur de CD
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne atteinte d’un handicap physique

For owners

646

Camper information
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulation
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/
or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on
truck-camper loading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this information.

Center of gravity location
The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center
of gravity zone.
1 Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight

rating
2 Rear end of truck bed


Double Cab models with standard bed



CrewMax models



Double Cab models with long
bed

647

Double Cab models
CrewMax models

42.6 in. (1082mm)

37.6 in. (955 mm)

WARNING
■ Loading precaution
If a load is too far back, it can cause dangerous handling. If it is too far forward, the front axle may be overloaded.

Cargo weight rating and proper matching
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load
of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the
weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the
manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and
the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should
not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s center of
gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended center of gravity
zone when installed.
1 Camper center of gravity
2 Recommended center of grav-

ity location zone

For owners

648
■ Cargo weight rating

NO.

Engine

Drive

Cab

2WD
1UR-FE

3UR-FE

430 195

Limited

1385

635 288

Long

SR5

1395

495 225

Standard

SR5

1320

420 191

Limited

1300

550 249

Long

SR5

1290

390 177

1355

455 206

1245

345 156

SR5

1325

425 193

Limited

1295

545 247

Platinum

1280

530 240

SR5

1230

330 150

Limited

1185

435 197

Platinum

1185

435 197

4WD

SR5

4WD

2WD

14
3UR-FE
3UR-FBE

1330

2WD

525 238

SR5

2WD

3UR-FE

535 243

1425

1435

8
1UR-FE

SR5

Standard
Double

3UR-FE
3UR-FBE

lbs

4WD

Grade

Cargo
Weight
Rating

Standard

Bed

Pas V.C.W.
sen
ger
lbs

4WD

Crew
Max

Short

649
WARNING
■ Overloading
Be careful — overloading can cause dangerous braking and handling problems, and can damage your vehicle and its tires.

Gross axle and vehicle weight ratings
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a
scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to
determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These
ratings are given on the vehicle certification label which is located on
the door latch post on the left side of the vehicle. (→P. 600) If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights
below the ratings.


Gross axle weight rating

1 Front GAWR
2 Rear GAWR



Gross vehicle weight rating

1 Not exceed GVWR
10

For owners

650
■ GAWR and GVWR


Double Cab models
Model
code*

UPK51LCRTSKA
UPK56LCRTSKA
USK51LCRTSKA
USK51LCRTLKA
USK51LCRTSGA
USK51LCRTLGA

Engine

Driving
system

3UR-FE

USK52LCHTSGA

3UR-FBE

Standard

USK57LCHTSGA

4100 lb. 6900 lb.
(1860 kg) (3130 kg)
3900 lb.
(1770 kg)

2WD

Long

7000 lb.
(3175 kg)

Standard

7100 lb.
(3220 kg)

Long
4WD

USK56LCRTSGA
3UR-FBE

GVWR

4000 lb.
(1815 kg)

3UR-FE

USK57LCHTSKA

Rear

4WD

USK56LCRTSKA

USK56LCRTLGA

Front

3900 lb. 4000 lb. 6700 lb.
(1770 kg) (1815 kg) (3040 kg)

3UR-FE

3UR-FBE

GAWR

2WD
1UR-FE

USK52LCHTSKA

USK56LCRTLKA

Bed
type

4150 lb.
(1880 kg)
4000 lb.
(1815 kg)

7200 lb.
(3265 kg)

Standard

7100 lb.
(3220 kg)

Long

7200 lb.
(3265 kg)

*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 600)

651


CrewMax models
Model
code*

UPK51LPSTSKA
UPK56LPSTSKA

Engine

Driving
system

Bed
type

GAWR
Front

Rear

GVWR

2WD

3900 lb. 4050 lb. 6800 lb.
(1770 kg) (1835 kg) (3085 kg)

4WD

4000 lb.
(1815 kg)

1UR-FE

USK51LPSTSKA
USK51LPSTLKA

3UR-FE

USK51LPSTZKA

USK51LPSTLGA

3900 lb.
(1770 kg)

2WD

USK51LPSTSGA

7000 lb.
(3175 kg)

3UR-FBE
Short

USK51LPSTZGA

4150 lb.
(1880 kg)

USK56LPSTSKA
USK56LPSTLKA

3UR-FE

USK56LPSTZKA
4WD

USK56LPSTSGA
USK56LPSTLGA

4000 lb.
(1815 kg)

7200 lb.
(3265 kg)

3UR-FBE

USK56LPSTZGA

For owners

*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 600)

652

653

Index

What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) .................... 654
Alphabetical index ..................... 657

For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the multimedia
system.
Multimedia system types: →P. 322

654

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting
your Toyota dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
● If you lose your keys, new genuine keys can be made by your Toyota
dealer. (→P. 111)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
● Is the wireless key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 516)
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio
wave. (→P. 111)

The rear door cannot be opened
● Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is
set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector
lock. (→P. 116)

If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
● Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 195)
● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 582)
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress
the brake pedal
● Is the engine switch in the “ON” position?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in the “ON” position. (→P. 201)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

655

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is
stopped
● It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is removed from the
engine switch. (→P. 196)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power
window switches
● Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 147)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (→P. 548)

● The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P. 205)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(→P. 547, 555)

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 85)
To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position, or
start the engine.

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to
P. 547, 555.

656

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
(→P. 565)

The vehicle becomes stuck
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or
snow. (→P. 588)

Alphabetical index

657

Alphabetical index
A
A/C .................................... 412, 419
Air conditioning filter ............. 513
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 419
Manual air conditioning
system ................................ 412
ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) .................................. 301
Function ................................ 301
Warning light......................... 548
Air conditioning filter .............. 513
Air conditioning
system............................ 412, 419
Air conditioning filter ............. 513
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 419
Manual air conditioning
system ................................ 412
Airbags ....................................... 38
Airbag operating conditions .... 46
Airbag precautions
for your child......................... 42
Airbag warning light .............. 547
Correct driving posture ........... 30
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions ............. 46
Curtain shield airbag
precautions........................... 43
Front passenger occupant
classification system............. 50
General airbag precautions .... 42
Locations of airbags................ 38

Modification and disposal
of airbags ............................. 45
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................. 46
Side airbag precautions.......... 43
Side and curtain shield
airbags operating
conditions ............................. 46
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions.............. 43
SRS airbags ........................... 38
Alarm
Alarm ...................................... 85
Warning buzzer ............ 547, 555
Anchor brackets ........................ 60
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) ...................................... 301
Function................................ 301
Warning light......................... 548
Armrest..................................... 454
Assist grips.............................. 455
Audio input ...... 328, 347, 351, 355
Audio remote control switches*
Audio system............................ 322
Antenna ................................ 408
Audio input.... 328, 347, 351, 355
Audio settings ....................... 332
AUX port/
USB port..... 328, 347, 351, 355
Bluetooth® audio .......... 363, 369
CD player.............................. 342
Display settings .................... 333
General settings ................... 330

*: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

658

Alphabetical index

iPod............................... 328, 347
MP3/WMA disc ..................... 342
Portable music
player.......... 328, 347, 351, 355
Radio .................................... 340
Setup menu .......................... 329
USB memory ................ 328, 351
AUTO LSD system................... 299
Automatic High Beam ............. 211
Automatic light control
system.................................... 206
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission......... 197
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 201
TOW/HAUL switch................ 200
AUX port ........................... 328, 355
Auxiliary boxes ........................ 445

B
Back window
Back window......................... 150
Power back window .............. 151
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 532
Wattage ................................ 609
Battery ...................................... 492
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.......................... 582
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 312
Warning light......................... 547
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) ....... 286
Bluetooth®
Audio system ................ 363, 369
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ..... 363, 370
Bottle holders .......................... 444
Brake
Fluid ...................................... 490
Parking brake........................ 205
Warning buzzer..................... 547
Warning light......................... 547

Brake assist ............................. 301
Brake Override System........... 161
Break-in tips............................. 162
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control .................................. 97
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)....... 286
Blind Spot Monitor
function............................... 290
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function............................... 293

C
Camper information ................ 646
Card holder .............................. 436
Care .................................. 470, 473
Aluminum wheels ................. 471
Exterior ................................. 470
Interior .................................. 473
Seat belts.............................. 474
Cargo capacity......................... 171
Cargo lamp
Light switch........................... 431
Replacing light bulbs ............ 534
Wattage ................................ 609
CD player.................................. 342
Certification label ............ 176, 600
Chains ...................................... 313
Child restraint system............... 56
Booster seats, definition ......... 57
Booster seats, installation....... 66
Convertible seats, definition ... 57
Convertible seats,
installation ............................ 65
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............ 50
Infant seats, definition............. 57
Infant seats, installation .......... 64
Installing CRS
with LATCH anchors ............ 62
Installing CRS with seat
belts...................................... 64

Alphabetical index

Installing CRS
with top tether strap........ 67, 70
Child safety ................................ 55
Airbag precautions.................. 42
Battery precautions............... 584
Child restraint system ............. 56
How your child should
wear the seat belt ................. 34
Installing child restraints ......... 60
Moon roof precautions .......... 157
Power back window
precautions......................... 153
Power window lock switch .... 147
Power window precautions ... 149
Rear door child-protector ...... 116
Removed wireless remote
control battery
precautions......................... 517
Seat belt extender
precautions........................... 37
Seat belt precautions .............. 59
Seat heater precautions........ 427
Child-protectors....................... 116
Cleaning ........................... 470, 473
Aluminum wheels.................. 471
Exterior ................................. 470
Interior................................... 473
Seat belts.............................. 474
Clock......................................... 451
Compass .................................. 465
Condenser................................ 490
Console box ............................. 435
Coolant ..................................... 488
Capacity................................ 604
Checking............................... 488
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 312
Cooling system........................ 488
Engine overheating............... 585
CRS ............................................. 56

659

Cruise control
Cruise control ....................... 266
Dynamic radar
cruise control...................... 252
Cup holders ............................. 442
Curtain shield airbags............... 39
Customizable features ............ 624

D
Daytime running light
system.................................... 209
Deck hooks .............................. 449
Defogger
Back window................. 414, 421
Outside rear view
mirrors ........................ 414, 421
Windshield .................... 414, 421
Differential................................ 605
Dimensions .............................. 592
Dinghy towing.......................... 194
Display
Drive information .................. 101
Dynamic radar
cruise control...................... 252
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert) ....... 244
Multi-information display....... 100
Trip information..................... 100
Warning message................. 555
Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 482

660

Alphabetical index

Doors ........................................ 114
Automatic door locking
and unlocking system......... 117
Door glasses......................... 147
Door lock............................... 115
Open door warning
message............................. 557
Outside rear view mirrors...... 142
Rear door child-protector ...... 116
Side doors............................. 114
Driver’s seat position
memory .................................. 128
Drive-Start Control .................. 161
Driving ...................................... 160
Break-in tips.......................... 162
Correct driving posture ........... 30
Driving assist system ............ 301
Procedures ........................... 160
Winter drive tips .................... 312
Dynamic radar
cruise control ........................ 252
Constant speed
control mode....................... 257
Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode ........ 259

E
EDR (Event data recorder)........ 10
Emergency, in case of
If the engine will not start...... 580
If the vehicle has discharged
battery ................................ 582
If the warning buzzer
sounds................................ 547
If the warning light turns
on ....................................... 547
If the warning message
is displayed ........................ 555
If you have a flat tire ............. 565
If you lose your keys............. 111
If you think something
is wrong.............................. 545
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 588
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency... 539
If your vehicle needs
to be towed......................... 540
If your vehicle overheats....... 585
Emergency flashers ................ 538
Engine
“ACC” position ...................... 195
Compartment........................ 485
Engine switch ....................... 195
Hood ..................................... 484
How to start the engine......... 195
Identification number ............ 600
If the engine will not start...... 580
Ignition switch
(engine switch) ................... 195
Immobilizer system................. 76
Overheating .......................... 585
Engine coolant......................... 488
Capacity................................ 604
Checking............................... 488
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 312
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ....................................... 95

Alphabetical index

Engine immobilizer system ...... 76
Engine oil ................................. 486
Capacity................................ 602
Checking............................... 486
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 312
Engine oil maintenance
data......................................... 477
Engine switch
(ignition switch)..................... 195
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light) ............ 429
Event data recorder (EDR)........ 10

F
FFV.................................... 221, 610
Flat tire...................................... 565
Flex-fuel............................ 221, 610
Flexible fuel vehicle......... 221, 610
Floor mats .................................. 28
Fluid
Automatic transmission......... 606
Brake .................................... 607
Washer ................................. 494
Fog lights ................................. 216
Replacing light bulbs............. 530
Switch ................................... 216
Wattage ................................ 609
Foot well light .......................... 429
Four-wheel drive system ........ 296
Front passenger occupant
classification system .............. 50
Front personal lights............... 430
Front seats ............................... 123
Adjustment............................ 123
Cleaning................................ 473
Correct driving posture ........... 30
Driving position memory ....... 128
Head restraints ..................... 132
Power easy access
system ................................ 128
Seat heaters ......................... 426
Seat position memory ........... 128

661

Seat ventilators..................... 426
Front side marker lights
Light switch........................... 206
Replacing light bulbs ............ 528
Wattage ................................ 609
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 527
Turn signal lever ................... 204
Wattage ................................ 609
Fuel ........................................... 601
Capacity................................ 601
Fuel gauge.............................. 95
Fuel pump shut off system ... 546
Gas station information......... 672
Information............................ 610
Refueling .............................. 220
Type.............................. 221, 601
Warning light......................... 548
Warning message................. 558
Fuel consumption
Average fuel
consumption....................... 107
Current fuel consumption ..... 107
Fuel filler door ......................... 220
Fuel pump shut off system..... 546
Fuses ........................................ 518

G
Garage door opener ................ 456
Gas station information .......... 672
Gauges ....................................... 95
Glove box ................................. 434

662

Alphabetical index

H
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)........ 363, 370
Head restraints ........................ 132
Headlights ................................ 206
Automatic High Beam ........... 211
Light switch ........................... 206
Replacing light bulbs............. 523
Wattage ................................ 609
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 419
Manual air conditioning
system ................................ 412
Outside rear view
mirrors ........................ 414, 421
Seat heaters ......................... 426
High mounted stoplight
Replacing.............................. 534
Wattage ................................ 609
Hood ......................................... 484
Hooks
Deck hooks ........................... 449
Retaining hooks (floor mat)..... 28
Horn .......................................... 137

I
I/M test ...................................... 481
Identification
Engine .................................. 600
Tire ....................................... 615
Vehicle.................................. 600
Ignition switch
(engine switch)...................... 195
Ignition switch light
(engine switch light) ............. 429
Illuminated entry system ........ 431
Immobilizer system ................... 76
Indicators ................................... 92
Initialization
Maintenance ......................... 477
Moon roof ............................. 156
Tire pressure
warning system .................. 497
Inside rear view mirror............ 139
Instrument panel light
control...................................... 97
Interior lights ........................... 429
Personal lights ...................... 430
Switches ............................... 430
Wattage ................................ 609
Intuitive parking assist ........... 270
Function................................ 270
Warning message......... 557, 558

Alphabetical index

J
Jack
Positioning the jack............... 572
Vehicle-equipped jack........... 566
Jack handle .............................. 570
Jam protection function
Moon roof.............................. 154
Power windows..................... 148

K
Keyless entry ........................... 114
Wireless remote control ........ 114
Keys .......................................... 110
Engine switch........................ 195
If you lose your keys ............. 111
Ignition switch ....................... 195
Key number plate.................. 110
Keyless entry ........................ 114
Replacing the battery............ 516
Wireless remote control ........ 114
Knee airbags .............................. 39

L
Lane Departure Alert
(LDA) ...................................... 244
Language
(multi-information display)... 100
LATCH anchors ................... 62, 63
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert) .......... 244
Lane departure alert
function............................... 244
Vehicle sway warning ........... 245
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever.............. 484
Hood lock release lever ........ 484
Shift lever.............................. 197
Turn signal lever ................... 204
Wiper lever............................ 217

663

License plate lights
Light switch........................... 206
Replacing light bulbs ............ 533
Wattage ................................ 609
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................. 523
Wattage ................................ 609
Lights
Automatic High Beam........... 211
Cargo lamp switch ................ 431
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light)........... 429
Fog light switch..................... 216
Headlight switch ................... 206
Illuminated entry system....... 431
Interior lights ......................... 430
Interior lights list.................... 429
Outer foot light ...................... 429
Personal lights ...................... 430
Replacing light bulbs ............ 521
Turn signal lever ................... 204
Vanity lights .......................... 450
Wattage ................................ 609
Load capacity .......................... 171
Luggage compartment
features .................................. 449
Luggage storage box .............. 447

664

Alphabetical index

M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance... 482
General maintenance ........... 478
Maintenance data ................. 592
Maintenance requirements ... 476
Resetting the message
indicating maintenance is
required .............................. 477
Malfunction indicator lamp..... 547
Manual headlight leveling
dial .......................................... 208
Map holder ............................... 438
Master warning light........ 548, 555
Meter
Indicators ................................ 92
Instrument panel light
control................................... 97
Meters..................................... 95
Multi-information display ....... 100
Warning lights ......................... 91
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......... 139
Outside rear view
mirror defoggers ......... 414, 421
Outside rear view mirrors...... 142
Vanity mirrors........................ 450
Moon roof ................................. 154
Door lock linked
moon roof operation ........... 155
Jam protection function......... 154
Operation .............................. 154
MP3 disc ................................... 342

Multi-information display........ 100
Customizing vehicle
features .............................. 624
Drive information .................. 101
Dynamic radar
cruise control...................... 252
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert) ....... 244
Settings................................. 104
Trip information..................... 100
Warning message................. 555

N
Noise from under vehicle ........... 8

O
Odometer ............................. 95, 97
Off-road precautions............... 316
Oil
Engine oil.............................. 602
Differential oil........................ 605
Transfer oil............................ 606
Opener
Hood ..................................... 484
Outer foot lights
Location ................................ 429
Replacing light bulbs ............ 534
Wattage ................................ 609
Outside rear view mirrors....... 142
Adjusting and folding ............ 142
Blind spot monitor................. 286
Mirror position memory......... 128
Outside rear view
mirror defoggers......... 414, 421
Outside temperature
display...................................... 95
Overhead console ................... 441
Overheating ............................. 585

Alphabetical index

P
Parking assist sensors
(intuitive parking assist)....... 270
Parking brake........................... 205
Operation .............................. 205
Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer ................... 547
Parking brake engaged
warning message ............... 557
Parking lights........................... 206
Light switch ........................... 206
Replacing light bulbs..... 527, 534
Wattage ................................ 609
PCS
(Pre-Collision System).......... 231
Pre-collision brake assist ...... 232
Pre-collision braking ............. 232
PCS warning......................... 232
Warning light......................... 550
Warning message................. 555
Pen holder ................................ 439
Personal lights......................... 430
Light switch ........................... 430
Wattage ................................ 609
Power back window ................ 151
Power easy access system .... 128
Power outlets ........................... 452
Power steering fluid ................ 491
Power windows........................ 147
Jam protection function......... 148
Operation .............................. 147
Window lock switch............... 147
Pre-Collision System
(PCS) ...................................... 231

665

R
Radar cruise control
(dynamic radar
cruise control) ....................... 252
Radiator.................................... 490
Radio ........................................ 340
Rear personal lights................ 430
Rear seat
Adjustment precautions ........ 127
Child seats/child restraint
system installation................ 60
Cleaning ............................... 473
Head restraints ..................... 132
Raising the bottom
cushion............................... 126
Rear side marker lights........... 206
Light switch........................... 206
Replacing light bulbs ............ 532
Wattage ................................ 609
Rear step bumper.................... 122
Rear turn signal lights ............ 204
Replacing light bulbs ............ 532
Turn signal lever ................... 204
Wattage ................................ 609
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror .......... 139
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 142
Rear view monitor system...... 277
Refueling .................................. 220
Capacity................................ 601
Fuel types ............................. 601
Opening the fuel tank cap..... 220

666

Alphabetical index

Replacing
Fuses .................................... 518
Light bulbs ............................ 521
Tires...................................... 565
Wireless remote control
battery ................................ 516
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners...................... 634
Resetting the message
indicating maintenance
is required.............................. 477

S
Seat belts.................................... 32
Adjusting the seat belt ............ 33
Automatic Locking
Retractor............................... 34
Child restraint system
installation ............................ 60
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt........................ 474
Emergency Locking
Retractor............................... 34
How to wear your seat belt ..... 32
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................... 34
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use ......................... 35
Reminder light and buzzer.... 548
Seat belt extender................... 34
Seat belt pretensioners........... 33
SRS warning light ................. 547
Seat heaters ............................. 426
Seat position memory ............. 128
Seat ventilators........................ 426
Seating capacity ...................... 171

Seats, Front.............................. 123
Adjustment............................ 123
Adjustment precautions ........ 125
Child seats/child restraint
system installation................ 60
Cleaning ............................... 473
Driving position memory ....... 128
Head restraints ..................... 132
Power easy access
system................................ 128
Properly sitting in the seat ...... 30
Seat heaters ......................... 426
Seat position memory........... 128
Seat ventilators..................... 426
Seats, Rear............................... 126
Adjustment precautions ........ 127
Child seats/child restraint
system installation................ 60
Cleaning ............................... 473
Head restraints ..................... 132
Raising the bottom
cushion............................... 126
Sensor
Automatic headlight
system................................ 209
Automatic High Beam
system................................ 211
Camera sensor ..................... 226
Inside rear view mirror .......... 141
Intuitive parking assist .......... 270
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert) ....... 244
Radar sensor ........................ 226
Service reminder indicators ..... 90
Shift lever ................................. 197
Automatic transmission ........ 197
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P .... 201
Shift lock system..................... 201
Side airbags ............................... 39
Side doors................................ 114

Alphabetical index

Side marker lights ................... 206
Light switch ........................... 206
Replacing light bulbs..... 528, 532
Wattage ................................ 609
Side mirrors ............................. 142
Adjusting and folding ............ 142
BSM (Blind spot monitor)...... 286
Mirror position memory ......... 128
Side turn signal lights ............. 204
Replacing light bulbs..... 528, 532
Turn signal lever ................... 204
Wattage ................................ 609
Snow tires ................................ 314
Spare tire .................................. 565
Inflation pressure .................. 607
Replacing.............................. 565
Storage location.................... 566
Spark plug ................................ 604
Specifications .......................... 592
Speedometer.............................. 95
Steering
Column lock release ............. 196
Steering wheel
Adjustment.................... 136, 137
Steering wheel
position memory ................. 128
Steering wheel audio switches*
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 532
Wattage ................................ 609
Storage box.............................. 447
Storage feature ........................ 432
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................... 588
Sun visors ................................ 450

667

Switches
Automatic High Beam........... 211
Back window defogger
switch ......................... 414, 421
BSM (Blind spot monitor)
main switch ........................ 286
Cargo lamp main switch ....... 431
Cruise control switch ............ 266
Door lock switch ................... 115
Driving position memory
switches ............................. 128
Dynamic radar cruise
control switch ..................... 252
Emergency flashers switch... 538
Engine switch ....................... 195
Fog light switch..................... 216
Front-wheel drive control
switch ................................. 296
Garage door opener
switches ............................. 456
Ignition switch ....................... 195
Intuitive parking assist .......... 270
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
switch ................................ 244
Light switches ....................... 206
Moon roof switches............... 154
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers switch ........ 414, 421
Outside rear view mirror
switches ............................. 142
Personal/interior lights
main switch ........................ 430
Power back window
switch ................................. 151
Power door lock switch......... 115
Power window switches........ 147

*: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

668

Alphabetical index

Seat heater switches ............ 426
Seat ventilator switches ........ 426
Tilt and telescopic
steering control switch........ 137
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ................................. 497
TOW/HAUL switch................ 200
Turn signal lights................... 204
VSC off
switch ......................... 299, 304
Window lock switch............... 147
Windshield wiper
de-icer switch ............. 415, 422
Windshield wipers
and washer switch.............. 217

T
Tachometer ................................ 95
Tail lights.................................. 206
Light switch ........................... 206
Replacing light bulbs............. 532
Wattage ................................ 609
Tailgate
Removing the tailgate ........... 119
Tailgate ................................. 118
Talk switch ............................... 399
Telephone switches ................ 383
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ...................................... 85
Engine immobilizer system ..... 76
Tire inflation pressure............. 507
Maintenance data ................. 607
Warning light......................... 549
Tire information ....................... 614
Glossary................................ 619
Size....................................... 615
Tire identification number ..... 615
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading............................... 617

Tire pressure warning
system.................................... 496
Initializing.............................. 497
Installing tire pressure
warning valves and
transmitters ........................ 496
Registering ID codes ............ 498
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ................................. 497
Warning light......................... 549
Tires.......................................... 495
Chains .................................. 313
Checking............................... 495
If you have a flat tire ............. 565
Inflation pressure .................. 607
Information............................ 614
Replacing.............................. 565
Rotating tires ........................ 495
Size....................................... 607
Snow tires............................. 314
Spare tire .............................. 566
Tire pressure warning
system................................ 496
Warning light......................... 549
Tissue pocket .......................... 440
Tools......................................... 566
Top tether strap ................... 67, 70
Total load capacity .......... 171, 594
TOW/HAUL switch................... 200
Towing
Bumper towing...................... 185
Dinghy towing ....................... 194
Emergency towing ................ 542
Fifth wheel trailer .................. 184
Trailer brake controller.......... 308
Trailer towing ........................ 173
TRAC (Traction Control) ......... 301

Alphabetical index

Toyota Safety Sense P ............ 224
Automatic High Beam ........... 211
Dynamic radar cruise
control................................. 252
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert)........ 244
PCS
(Pre-Collision System)........ 231
Trailer brake controller ........... 308
Transmission ........................... 197
Automatic transmission......... 197
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 201
S mode ................................. 199
Trip meters ........................... 95, 97
Turn signal lights..................... 204
Replacing light
bulbs................... 527, 532, 534
Turn signal lever ................... 204
Wattage ................................ 609

669

U
USB port................... 328, 347, 351

V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights .......................... 450
Wattage ................................ 609
Vanity mirrors .......................... 450
Vehicle data recordings.............. 9
Vehicle identification
number................................... 600
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) ...................................... 301
Ventilators
(seat ventilators) ................... 426
Voice command system ......... 399
VSC
(Vehicle Stability Control) .... 301

670

Alphabetical index

W
Warning buzzers
Brake system ................ 547, 557
Downshifting ......................... 203
Intuitive parking assist .......... 271
Key reminder ........................ 196
Light reminder....................... 210
Open door............................. 557
Open moon roof.................... 156
PCS
(Pre-Collision System)........ 550
Seat belt reminder ................ 548
Warning lights............................ 91
ABS....................................... 548
Brake system ........................ 547
Charging system................... 547
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert)........ 550
Low fuel level ........................ 548
Malfunction indicator lamp .... 547
Master warning light.............. 548
Parking brake
warning light ....................... 548
PCS
(Pre-Collision System)........ 550
Seat belt reminder light........ 548
Slip indicator ......................... 549
SRS ...................................... 547
Tire pressure......................... 549

Warning messages.................. 555
Washer ..................................... 217
Checking............................... 494
Low windshield washer fluid
warning message ............... 558
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 312
Switch ................................... 217
Washing and waxing............... 470
Weight
Cargo capacity...................... 171
Cargo weight rating .............. 648
Gross axle weight rating ....... 650
Gross combination
weight rating....................... 177
Gross vehicle weight
rating .................................. 650
Load limits ............................ 171
Towing capacity............ 171, 177
Trailer Weight
Rating......................... 171, 177
TWR ............................. 171, 177
Vehicle capacity
weight......................... 171, 594
Wheels
Replacing wheels ................. 511
Size....................................... 607
Window glasses ...................... 147
Window lock switch ................ 147

Alphabetical index

Windows................................... 147
Back window......................... 150
Back window
defogger ..................... 414, 421
Power back window .............. 151
Power windows..................... 147
Windshield wiper
de-icer ............................ 415, 422
Windshield wipers ................... 217
Winter driving tips ................... 312
Wireless remote control key
Locking/Unlocking................. 114
Replacing the battery............ 516
WMA disc ................................. 342

671

672
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever

Fuel filler door

P. 484

P. 220

Hood lock release
lever

Tire inflation pressure

P. 484

P. 607

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)

Standard fuel tank:
26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 Imp.gal.)
Large fuel tank:
38.0 gal. (144.0 L, 31.7 Imp.gal.)

Fuel type

P. 601

Cold tire inflation pressure

P. 607

Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill — reference)
Engine oil type

With filter
Without filter

qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
8.5 (8.0, 7.0)
7.9 (7.5, 6.6)
P. 602

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2018:06:05 09:06:09-05:00
Modify Date                     : 2018:06:05 09:06:09-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
Language                        : en
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Metadata Date                   : 2018:06:05 09:06:09-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:1cd88331-f9ee-4516-847d-b0165e370809
Instance ID                     : uuid:577fb240-b24a-4392-b4cc-b289a6144fa2
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 672

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

OM0C009U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation